1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2058 \begin_layout Standard
2059 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2060 are completions available.
2065 key to accept a proposed completion.
2066 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2067 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2068 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2075 \begin_layout Standard
2076 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2077 ing options for text.
2078 The special math option
2082 enables characters to be composed.
2083 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2084 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2087 , you can then input the characters
2088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2099 to a formula to get it.
2100 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2101 of the math toolbar.
2102 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2106 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2107 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2116 \begin_layout Section
2118 \begin_inset Index idx
2121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_inset Index idx
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 \begin_layout Standard
2195 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2208 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2210 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2214 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2221 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2232 \begin_inset space ~
2240 \begin_inset space ~
2261 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2265 \begin_layout Labeling
2266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2270 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2271 LatexCommand nomenclature
2273 description "Tabulator key"
2279 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2280 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2281 \begin_inset space ~
2285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2287 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2294 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2298 , especially section
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2305 reference "sub:Lists"
2311 If you are still confused, look in the
2316 \begin_inset Newline newline
2323 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2324 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2328 \begin_layout Labeling
2329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2334 LatexCommand nomenclature
2336 description "Escape key"
2343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2350 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2351 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2354 \begin_layout Labeling
2355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2361 \begin_inset space ~
2365 \begin_inset space ~
2372 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2373 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are three modifier keys:
2381 \begin_layout Labeling
2382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2401 LatexCommand nomenclature
2403 description "Control key"
2407 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2408 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2412 \begin_layout Itemize
2421 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2424 \begin_layout Itemize
2433 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2436 \begin_layout Itemize
2445 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2469 LatexCommand nomenclature
2471 description "Shift key"
2475 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2476 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2479 \begin_layout Labeling
2480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2498 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2499 LatexCommand nomenclature
2501 description "Alt or Meta key"
2505 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2506 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2507 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2513 \begin_inset Newline newline
2516 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2518 menu accelerator keys
2521 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2522 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2526 \begin_layout Standard
2527 For example, the sequence
2528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset space ~
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2592 manual lists all other things bound to the
2600 \begin_layout Standard
2601 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2602 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2603 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2604 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2605 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2606 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2607 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2609 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2625 followed by a capital
2632 \begin_layout Chapter
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_layout Section
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_layout Subsection
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2665 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2666 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2667 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2668 numbering schemes, and so on.
2669 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2670 and format the title of your document differently.
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2678 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2679 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2680 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2681 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2682 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2685 \begin_layout Subsection
2687 \begin_inset Index idx
2690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2699 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 You can select a class using the
2709 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2710 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2714 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2737 \begin_layout Description
2738 Article for basic articles
2741 \begin_layout Description
2742 Report for basic reports
2745 \begin_layout Description
2746 Book for writing a book
2749 \begin_layout Description
2750 Letter for US-style letters
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2755 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2756 will include many of these.
2757 Here are some of the classes.
2758 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2760 Special Document Classes
2769 \begin_layout Description
2770 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2785 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2786 There are three article layouts available.
2787 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2788 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2789 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2790 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2795 sequential numbering
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2800 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2801 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2802 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Beamer Layout for presentations
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2811 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2819 \begin_layout Description
2821 \begin_inset space ~
2824 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2831 \begin_layout Description
2832 Foils Used to make transparencies
2835 \begin_layout Description
2836 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2837 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2843 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2856 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2857 (Is used by this document.)
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2864 \begin_layout Description
2865 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2868 \begin_layout Description
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2881 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2883 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Slides Used to make transparencies
2890 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_inset space ~
2895 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2896 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2899 \begin_layout Description
2900 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2906 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2912 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2913 of the document classes.
2916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2921 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 \begin_inset Index idx
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2946 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2947 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2949 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2955 and some of them, like
2959 , are highly specialized.
2960 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2961 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2963 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2964 by some document class.
2965 There are just too many of them.
2966 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2969 \begin_layout Standard
2970 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2979 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2980 document class for a new file.
2981 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2986 Installing new LaTeX files
2987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 manual for information on how to install them.
2995 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3003 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3005 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3006 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3007 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3009 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3013 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3019 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3031 \begin_inset Index idx
3034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 \begin_layout Standard
3044 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3045 chosen document class.
3046 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3047 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3058 \begin_inset Index idx
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3068 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3074 always installed by default.
3075 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3076 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3077 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3078 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3079 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3080 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3081 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3084 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3088 \begin_inset Index idx
3091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Reconfiguration of LyX
3098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3101 Installing new LaTeX files
3102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3109 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3112 \begin_layout Standard
3113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3122 LyX will advise you about these things.
3130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3134 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3139 \begin_inset Index idx
3142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 Document ! Local Layout
3151 \begin_layout Standard
3152 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3153 used in a variety of different documents.
3154 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3155 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3156 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3157 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3158 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3159 What you want is LyX's
3160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3176 manual for information on how to use it.
3179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 Each class has a default set of options.
3185 Here's a quick table describing them:
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3197 \begin_inset Tabular
3198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3199 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3665 \begin_layout Standard
3666 You're probably also wondering what
3667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3671 \begin_inset space ~
3675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3679 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3680 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3685 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3690 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3700 headings, there are also
3708 headings, and so on.
3709 We will describe these headings fully in section
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3716 reference "sub:Headings"
3723 \begin_layout Subsection
3725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3727 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3732 \begin_inset Index idx
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3742 \begin_inset Index idx
3745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3754 \begin_layout Standard
3755 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3757 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3772 \begin_inset space ~
3777 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3779 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3780 to use for your document.
3781 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3785 \begin_layout Standard
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3796 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3802 \begin_inset space ~
3807 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3808 You can choose between the following five options:
3811 \begin_layout Labeling
3812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3817 Use default page style of current class.
3820 \begin_layout Labeling
3821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3826 No page numbers or headings.
3829 \begin_layout Labeling
3830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3838 \begin_layout Labeling
3839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3844 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3845 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3846 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3849 \begin_layout Labeling
3850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3855 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3856 have the LaTeX-package
3861 \begin_inset Index idx
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3871 How they are defined is explained in section
3872 \begin_inset space ~
3876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3878 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3885 \begin_layout Standard
3886 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3887 \begin_inset space ~
3891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3893 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3900 \begin_layout Subsection
3901 Paper Size and Orientation
3902 \begin_inset Index idx
3905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 Document ! Paper size
3912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3914 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3921 \begin_layout Standard
3922 You can find the following options in the menu
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3936 \begin_inset Index idx
3939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_layout Labeling
3949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3953 \begin_inset space ~
3958 What size paper to print on.
3963 \begin_layout Itemize
3969 \begin_layout Itemize
3975 \begin_layout Itemize
3981 \begin_layout Itemize
3987 \begin_layout Itemize
3990 US letter, US legal, US executive
3993 \begin_layout Itemize
3999 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 To choose whether to output as
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 \begin_inset space ~
4033 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4034 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4037 \begin_layout Subsection
4039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 \begin_layout Standard
4069 Paper margins are set in the menu
4071 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4089 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4090 the paper format and the font size into account.
4093 \begin_layout Subsection
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4103 That includes the paragraph environments.
4104 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4105 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4106 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4107 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4116 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4118 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4119 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4120 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4123 \begin_layout Section
4124 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4129 Paragraph ! Indentation
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4141 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4148 \begin_layout Standard
4149 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4150 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4153 \begin_layout Standard
4154 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4155 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4156 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4157 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4161 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4167 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4168 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4169 language than English.
4170 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4174 \begin_layout Standard
4175 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4176 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4178 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4179 LyX takes care of that.
4180 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4182 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4183 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4184 of a page, and so on.
4188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4189 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4194 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4195 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4199 these pre-coded spacings.
4200 We will explain more later.
4203 \begin_layout Subsection
4204 Paragraph Separation
4205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4207 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4212 \begin_inset Index idx
4215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4216 Paragraph ! Separation
4224 \begin_layout Standard
4232 \begin_inset space ~
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4251 \begin_inset Index idx
4254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4260 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4267 \begin_layout Standard
4268 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4271 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset space ~
4278 dialog and toggle the
4281 \begin_inset space ~
4286 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4289 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4293 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4294 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4300 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4303 \begin_layout Subsection
4305 \begin_inset Index idx
4308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4320 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4324 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4340 \begin_inset space ~
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4355 \begin_inset Index idx
4358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4364 installed to use this feature.
4369 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4373 \begin_inset space ~
4378 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4379 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4382 \begin_layout Section
4383 Paragraph Environments
4384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4386 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4395 Paragraph ! Environments
4401 \begin_inset Index idx
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4405 Paragraph environments|(
4413 \begin_layout Subsection
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4440 \begin_inset Newline newline
4443 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4444 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4445 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4454 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 A paragraph environment is simply a
4459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4466 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4467 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4468 scheme, labels, and so on.
4469 Additionally, you can
4470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4478 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4479 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4480 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4482 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4484 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4489 \begin_inset Graphics
4490 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4496 at the left end of the toolbar.
4497 LyX will change the environment of the
4501 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4502 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4503 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4507 \begin_layout Standard
4516 create a new paragraph using the
4520 paragraph environment.
4522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4529 because if you are in one of these environments:
4532 \begin_layout Itemize
4538 \begin_layout Itemize
4544 \begin_layout Itemize
4550 \begin_layout Itemize
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Itemize
4568 \begin_layout Itemize
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4575 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4579 , rather than resetting it to
4584 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4585 \begin_inset space ~
4589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4591 reference "sec:Nesting"
4598 \begin_layout Subsection
4602 \begin_layout Standard
4603 The default paragraph environment is
4608 It creates a plain paragraph.
4609 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4610 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4611 this manual) are in the
4618 \begin_layout Standard
4619 You can nest a paragraph using the
4623 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4631 \begin_layout Subsection
4633 \begin_inset Index idx
4636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4646 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4655 for thanks or contact information.
4656 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4657 page along with today's date.
4658 For other types of documents, the title
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4670 \begin_layout Standard
4671 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4685 Here's how you use them:
4688 \begin_layout Itemize
4689 Put the title of your document in the
4696 \begin_layout Itemize
4697 Put the author name in the
4704 \begin_layout Itemize
4705 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4706 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4712 Note that using this environment is optional.
4713 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4714 If you don't want a date, use the option
4716 Suppress default date on front page
4720 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4721 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4723 \begin_inset space ~
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 You can use footnotes to insert
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 or contact information.
4743 \begin_layout Subsection
4745 \begin_inset Index idx
4748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4764 \begin_layout Standard
4765 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4766 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4771 \begin_inset Index idx
4774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4775 Section headings ! Numbered
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4788 \begin_layout Enumerate
4794 \begin_layout Enumerate
4800 \begin_layout Enumerate
4806 \begin_layout Enumerate
4812 \begin_layout Enumerate
4818 \begin_layout Enumerate
4824 \begin_layout Enumerate
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4832 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4833 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4838 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4839 You group the book into chapters.
4840 LyX does a similar grouping:
4843 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 is divided into either
4859 \begin_layout Itemize
4871 \begin_layout Itemize
4883 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 Not all document types use the
4932 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4937 is the top-level heading.
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4950 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4951 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4953 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4967 \begin_inset Index idx
4970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4971 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 The unnumbered section headings have a
4981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4988 at the end of their name.
4989 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4990 the table of contents, see section
4991 \begin_inset space ~
4995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 Changing the Numbering
5006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5008 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5017 in the Table of Contents.
5018 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5020 Just as certain classes start with
5034 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5044 This is something you can change.
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5050 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5054 \begin_inset Index idx
5057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset space ~
5075 you will see two counters.
5080 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5082 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5087 Short Titles of Headings
5088 \begin_inset Index idx
5091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5092 Section headings ! Short titles
5098 \begin_inset Argument 1
5101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5110 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5117 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5119 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5120 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5121 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5126 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5127 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5128 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5139 This will insert a box labeled
5140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5144 \begin_inset space ~
5148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5151 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5152 This also works for captions inside floats.
5153 There can only be one short title per title.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 The following information applies to all section headings:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5169 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5173 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5176 \begin_layout Itemize
5177 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5184 \begin_layout Subsection
5185 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5188 \begin_layout Standard
5189 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5203 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5204 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5205 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5206 the text they contain.
5207 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5215 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5228 when you start a new paragraph.
5229 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5233 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5234 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5235 have to change back to the
5239 environment yourself.
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 \begin_inset Index idx
5254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5264 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5265 time for the differences.
5274 are identical except for one difference:
5278 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5287 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5291 Here's an example of the
5304 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5306 See – no indentation!
5310 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5311 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5312 the other paragraph.
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 Here's another example, this time in the
5323 \begin_layout Quotation
5329 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5330 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5331 the first line, then
5335 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5339 you were quoting other text.
5342 \begin_layout Quotation
5343 Here's a new paragraph.
5344 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5345 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5348 \begin_layout Standard
5349 As the examples show,
5353 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5354 They should put quotes in the
5359 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5363 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5368 \begin_inset Index idx
5371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5402 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5408 \begin_inset Newline newline
5411 Which I did not rehearse!
5415 It could be much worse.
5416 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5418 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5419 indented a bit more than the first.
5420 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5426 \begin_inset Newline newline
5429 And make things look fine
5430 \begin_inset Newline newline
5436 arg "newline-insert newline"
5442 \begin_layout Standard
5447 does not indent both margins.
5448 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5449 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5456 arg "newline-insert newline"
5462 \begin_layout Subsection
5464 \begin_inset Index idx
5467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5483 \begin_layout Standard
5484 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5494 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5503 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5504 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5505 describing some general features of all four of them.
5508 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5512 \begin_layout Standard
5513 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5515 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5524 reset the environment to
5528 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5529 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5530 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5534 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5538 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5545 \begin_layout Standard
5546 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5547 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5549 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5550 you read all of section
5551 \begin_inset space ~
5555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5557 reference "sec:Nesting"
5564 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5566 \begin_inset Index idx
5569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5590 paragraph environment.
5591 It has the following properties:
5594 \begin_layout Itemize
5595 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5599 \begin_layout Itemize
5600 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5603 \begin_layout Itemize
5604 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5608 \begin_layout Itemize
5609 The items can have any length.
5610 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5611 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5618 \begin_layout Itemize
5623 environment inside another
5627 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5631 \begin_layout Itemize
5632 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5635 \begin_layout Itemize
5636 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5639 \begin_layout Itemize
5641 \begin_inset space ~
5645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5647 reference "sec:Nesting"
5651 for a full explanation of nesting.
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5656 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5665 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5668 \begin_layout Standard
5669 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5670 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5673 \begin_layout Itemize
5674 The label for the first level
5678 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5682 \begin_layout Itemize
5683 The label for the second level is a dash.
5687 \begin_layout Itemize
5688 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5692 \begin_layout Itemize
5693 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5697 \begin_layout Itemize
5698 Back out to the third level.
5702 \begin_layout Itemize
5703 Back to the second level.
5707 \begin_layout Itemize
5708 Back to the outermost level.
5711 \begin_layout Standard
5712 These are the default labels for an
5717 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5719 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5722 dialog in the submenu
5727 \begin_inset Index idx
5730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5736 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5739 \begin_layout Standard
5740 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5741 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5743 \begin_inset space ~
5747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5749 reference "sec:Nesting"
5756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5758 \begin_inset Index idx
5761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5770 name "sec:Enumerate"
5777 \begin_layout Standard
5782 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5783 It has these properties:
5786 \begin_layout Enumerate
5787 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5791 \begin_layout Enumerate
5792 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5796 \begin_layout Enumerate
5797 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5800 \begin_layout Enumerate
5805 environment resets the counter to one.
5808 \begin_layout Enumerate
5821 \begin_layout Enumerate
5822 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5823 Items can have any length.
5826 \begin_layout Enumerate
5827 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5830 \begin_layout Enumerate
5831 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5834 \begin_layout Enumerate
5835 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5839 \begin_layout Standard
5848 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5849 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5856 \begin_layout Enumerate
5857 The first level of an
5861 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5865 \begin_layout Enumerate
5866 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5870 \begin_layout Enumerate
5871 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5876 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5879 \begin_layout Enumerate
5880 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5885 \begin_layout Enumerate
5886 Back to the third level
5890 \begin_layout Enumerate
5891 Back to the second level.
5895 \begin_layout Enumerate
5896 Back to the outermost level.
5899 \begin_layout Standard
5900 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5904 environment, see section
5905 \begin_inset space ~
5909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5911 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5916 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5919 \begin_layout Standard
5920 There is more to nesting
5924 environments than we've stated here.
5925 You should read section
5926 \begin_inset space ~
5930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5932 reference "sec:Nesting"
5936 to learn more about nesting.
5939 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5941 \begin_inset Index idx
5944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5958 list has no fixed label.
5959 Instead, LyX uses the first
5960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5967 of the first line as the label.
5971 \begin_layout Description
5972 Example: This is an example of the
5979 \begin_layout Standard
5980 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5984 \begin_layout Standard
5986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5993 it is meant that the first usage of the
5997 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5999 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6007 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6012 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6013 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6015 \begin_inset space ~
6021 \begin_inset space ~
6025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6027 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6031 for more information.) Here is an example:
6034 \begin_layout Description
6036 \begin_inset space ~
6039 Example: This one shows how to use a
6042 \begin_inset space ~
6054 \begin_layout Description
6055 Usage: You should use the
6059 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6060 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6062 It's not a good idea to use a
6066 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6067 You're better off using
6079 paragraphs into them.
6082 \begin_layout Description
6083 Nesting: You can nest
6087 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6091 \begin_layout Standard
6092 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6093 them from the first line.
6096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6098 \begin_inset Index idx
6101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6110 \begin_layout Standard
6115 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6118 \begin_layout Standard
6127 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6129 Here are its properties:
6132 \begin_layout Labeling
6133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6135 \begin_inset space ~
6138 labels LyX uses the first
6139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6146 of each line as the item label.
6151 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6152 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6153 space as described above.
6156 \begin_layout Labeling
6157 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6158 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6159 the body of the item text.
6160 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6161 label width plus a little extra space.
6165 \begin_layout Labeling
6166 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6168 \begin_inset space ~
6171 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6173 If the label width is larger, the label
6174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6181 into the first line.
6182 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6183 margin of the rest of the item text.
6186 \begin_layout Labeling
6187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6189 \begin_inset space ~
6192 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6197 environment has the same left margin.
6198 \begin_inset Newline newline
6201 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6204 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6206 \begin_inset space ~
6211 dialog (toolbar button
6214 arg "layout-paragraph"
6221 \begin_inset space ~
6226 determines the default label width.
6227 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6236 multiple times instead.
6237 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6246 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6249 \begin_inset space ~
6254 every time you alter a label in a
6259 \begin_inset Newline newline
6262 The predefined default width is the length of
6263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6271 \begin_inset space ~
6277 \begin_layout Standard
6282 list the same way as the
6286 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6292 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6296 \begin_layout Standard
6301 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6302 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6304 \begin_inset space ~
6308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6310 reference "sec:Nesting"
6314 to learn about nesting.
6317 \begin_layout Standard
6318 There is yet another feature of the
6322 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6324 You can use additional
6328 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6333 are documented in section
6334 \begin_inset space ~
6338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6340 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6345 Here are some examples:
6348 \begin_layout Labeling
6349 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6350 Left The default for
6357 \begin_layout Labeling
6358 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6359 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6366 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6369 \begin_layout Labeling
6370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6371 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6375 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6382 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6385 \begin_layout Subsection
6387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6389 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6394 \begin_inset Index idx
6397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6406 \begin_layout Standard
6407 The features described in this section require that the module
6409 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6411 is loaded in the document settings.
6412 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6417 \begin_inset Index idx
6420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6421 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6429 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6430 Custom Enumerate Lists
6431 \begin_inset Index idx
6434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6435 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6443 \begin_layout Standard
6445 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6448 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6451 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6452 There you add the command
6455 \begin_layout Standard
6463 \begin_layout Standard
6464 in TeX Code (shortcut
6474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6475 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6476 \begin_inset space ~
6480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6482 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6495 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6502 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6503 For capital Roman numerals replace
6515 in the command above.
6516 For Arabic numerals use
6524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6531 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6546 \begin_layout Standard
6548 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6556 You can only number 26
6557 \begin_inset space ~
6560 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6568 \begin_layout Standard
6569 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6570 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6573 \begin_layout Standard
6574 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6577 \begin_layout Enumerate
6578 \begin_inset Argument 1
6581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6607 \begin_layout Enumerate
6608 \begin_inset Argument 1
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6634 \begin_layout Enumerate
6639 \begin_layout Enumerate
6640 \begin_inset Argument 1
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6667 \begin_layout Enumerate
6668 \begin_inset Argument 1
6671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6698 For this list these commands were used:
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6712 \begin_inset Newline newline
6720 \begin_inset Newline newline
6728 \begin_inset Newline newline
6738 \begin_layout Standard
6745 makes the label emphasized and
6754 \begin_layout Standard
6755 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6763 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6764 lists until you change the definition.
6772 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6774 \begin_inset Index idx
6777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6786 \begin_layout Standard
6787 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6790 \begin_layout Enumerate
6791 \begin_inset Argument 1
6794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 \begin_inset Note Note
6816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 goes back to default numbering
6825 \begin_layout Enumerate
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6833 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6837 \begin_layout Standard
6838 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6843 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6844 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6847 \begin_layout Standard
6848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6864 \begin_layout Standard
6865 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6867 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6868 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6869 of a normal enumeration.
6870 There, insert the command
6873 \begin_layout Standard
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6884 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6888 \begin_layout Enumerate
6892 \begin_layout Enumerate
6896 \begin_layout Standard
6897 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6920 This enumeration starts at 4
6923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6925 \begin_inset Index idx
6928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6938 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6940 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6943 \begin_layout Itemize
6947 \begin_layout Itemize
6948 with standard spacing
6951 \begin_layout Standard
6952 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6954 Add there the command
6958 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6961 \begin_layout Itemize
6962 \begin_inset Argument 1
6965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6984 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 \begin_layout Itemize
6992 \begin_layout Standard
6993 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6999 \begin_inset Index idx
7002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7003 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7009 For more information see its documentation,
7010 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7019 \begin_layout Standard
7020 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7022 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7023 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7027 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7030 \begin_layout Enumerate
7031 \begin_inset Argument 1
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7042 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7055 \begin_layout Enumerate
7056 with negative indentation
7059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7060 Further Customization
7061 \begin_inset Index idx
7064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 Lists ! Customization
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7074 You can also change the style of description lists.
7078 \begin_layout Standard
7084 \begin_layout Standard
7085 changes the description label font, the command
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7095 sets the list style.
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 An example where the command
7102 \begin_layout Standard
7107 itshape, style=nextline
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7114 \begin_layout Description
7116 \begin_inset space ~
7120 \begin_inset Argument 1
7123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7129 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7131 itshape, style=nextline
7141 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7142 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7146 \begin_layout Description
7148 \begin_inset space ~
7151 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7152 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7153 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7156 \begin_layout Standard
7157 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7163 \begin_inset Index idx
7166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7167 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7173 For more information see its documentation
7174 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7183 \begin_layout Subsection
7185 \begin_inset Index idx
7188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7205 \begin_inset space ~
7213 \begin_layout Standard
7214 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7222 \begin_inset space ~
7228 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7229 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7230 In contrast, you can use the
7237 \begin_inset space ~
7242 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7243 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7247 \begin_layout Standard
7248 Of course, you're not limited to using
7255 \begin_inset space ~
7264 \begin_inset space ~
7269 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7270 some European academic papers.
7273 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7277 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7284 \begin_layout Standard
7289 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7290 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7294 \begin_inset space ~
7299 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7300 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7301 Here's an example of each:
7304 \begin_layout Right Address
7306 \begin_inset Newline newline
7310 \begin_inset Newline newline
7314 \begin_inset Newline newline
7317 When is it? What is today?
7320 \begin_layout Standard
7324 \begin_inset space ~
7330 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7331 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7332 Here's an example of the
7339 \begin_layout Address
7341 \begin_inset Newline newline
7344 Where do I send this
7345 \begin_inset Newline newline
7348 Your post office and country
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 As you can see, both
7359 \begin_inset space ~
7364 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7369 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7375 This makes sense, since
7383 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7384 Thus, you have to use
7391 arg "newline-insert newline"
7396 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7397 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7399 \begin_inset space ~
7403 \begin_inset space ~
7408 ) to start a new line in an
7415 \begin_inset space ~
7423 \begin_layout Subsection
7427 \begin_layout Standard
7428 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7429 or list of references.
7430 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7433 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7437 \begin_inset Index idx
7440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7449 \begin_layout Standard
7454 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7455 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7456 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7457 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7471 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7472 The book document classes ignores the
7476 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7480 in a letter document class.
7483 \begin_layout Standard
7488 environment does several things for you.
7489 First, it puts the centered label
7490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7498 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7500 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7501 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7502 the subsequent text.
7503 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7504 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7508 \begin_layout Standard
7509 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7513 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7514 The new paragraph will still be in the
7519 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7520 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7523 \begin_layout Standard
7524 \begin_inset Float figure
7529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7531 \begin_inset Graphics
7532 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7540 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7545 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7566 \begin_layout Standard
7567 We would love to demonstrate the
7571 environment, but since this document is in the
7572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7579 class, we can't do this.
7580 We inserted it therefore as figure
7581 \begin_inset space ~
7585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7587 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7592 If you have never heard of an
7593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7600 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7609 \begin_inset Index idx
7612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7621 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7628 \begin_layout Standard
7633 environment is used to list references.
7634 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7635 only use it at the end of the document.
7647 \begin_layout Standard
7648 When you first open a
7652 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7668 depending on the document class.
7669 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7670 Each paragraph of the
7674 environment is a bibliography entry.
7679 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7680 Each new paragraph is still in the
7687 \begin_layout Standard
7688 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7689 by using a BibTeX database.
7690 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7691 phy handling, have a look at section
7692 \begin_inset space ~
7696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7698 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7705 \begin_layout Subsection
7709 \begin_inset Index idx
7712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 Paragraph ! LyX code
7719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7728 \begin_layout Standard
7733 environment is another LyX extension.
7734 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7739 key as a fixed whitespace;
7743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7755 \begin_inset space ~
7760 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7765 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7766 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7769 arg "newline-insert newline"
7786 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7787 So, when you finish using the
7791 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7792 Also, you can nest the
7796 environment inside of others.
7799 \begin_layout Standard
7800 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7803 \begin_layout Itemize
7807 arg "newline-insert newline"
7810 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7815 \begin_inset space \space{}
7825 arg "newline-insert newline"
7831 \begin_layout Itemize
7835 arg "newline-insert newline"
7845 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7851 \begin_layout Itemize
7852 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7853 You must put at least one
7857 in any line you want blank.
7858 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7861 \begin_layout Itemize
7862 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7866 since that will insert
7871 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7874 arg "self-insert \""
7880 \begin_layout Standard
7884 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7888 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7892 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7896 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7900 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7901 printf("Hello World!
7906 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7910 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7914 \begin_layout Standard
7915 This is just the standard
7916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7932 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7933 rc-files, and so on.
7934 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7935 as if you used a typewriter.
7936 \begin_inset Index idx
7939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7940 Paragraph environments|)
7945 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7948 Program Code Listings
7953 \begin_inset space ~
7961 \begin_layout Section
7962 Nesting Environments
7963 \begin_inset Index idx
7966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7967 Nesting ! Environments
7973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7982 \begin_layout Subsection
7986 \begin_layout Standard
7987 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
7989 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
7991 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
7993 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
7995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8005 \begin_layout Enumerate
8009 \begin_layout Enumerate
8014 \begin_layout Enumerate
8018 \begin_layout Enumerate
8023 \begin_layout Enumerate
8027 \begin_layout Standard
8028 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8029 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8031 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8037 \begin_inset space ~
8045 \begin_inset space ~
8049 \begin_inset space ~
8054 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8056 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8059 arg "depth-increment"
8065 arg "depth-decrement"
8079 arg "depth-increment"
8085 arg "depth-decrement"
8089 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8090 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8096 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8097 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8098 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8101 \begin_layout Standard
8102 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8103 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8105 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8108 \begin_layout Subsection
8109 What You Can and Can't Nest
8112 \begin_layout Standard
8113 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8114 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8117 \begin_layout Standard
8118 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8119 than a simple yes or no.
8120 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8123 \begin_layout Itemize
8124 Completely unnestable
8127 \begin_layout Itemize
8128 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8132 \begin_layout Itemize
8133 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8137 \begin_layout Standard
8138 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8139 environments have them:
8142 \begin_layout Description
8143 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8144 Can't nest into them.
8148 \begin_layout Itemize
8154 \begin_layout Itemize
8160 \begin_layout Itemize
8166 \begin_layout Itemize
8172 \begin_layout Itemize
8179 \begin_layout Description
8181 \begin_inset space ~
8184 Nestable You can nest them.
8185 You can nest other things into them.
8189 \begin_layout Itemize
8195 \begin_layout Itemize
8201 \begin_layout Itemize
8207 \begin_layout Itemize
8213 \begin_layout Itemize
8219 \begin_layout Itemize
8225 \begin_layout Itemize
8231 \begin_layout Itemize
8238 \begin_layout Description
8239 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8240 You can't nest anything into them.
8244 \begin_layout Itemize
8250 \begin_layout Itemize
8256 \begin_layout Itemize
8262 \begin_layout Itemize
8268 \begin_layout Itemize
8274 \begin_layout Itemize
8280 \begin_layout Itemize
8286 \begin_layout Itemize
8292 \begin_layout Itemize
8298 \begin_layout Itemize
8304 \begin_layout Itemize
8310 \begin_layout Itemize
8316 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8326 \begin_inset space ~
8332 \begin_layout Itemize
8339 \begin_layout Standard
8340 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8348 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8358 \begin_inset space ~
8361 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8362 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8363 nested section headings violate this.
8371 \begin_layout Subsection
8372 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8373 \begin_inset Index idx
8376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8377 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8385 \begin_layout Standard
8386 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8387 affected by nesting anyhow.
8391 \begin_layout Itemize
8395 \begin_layout Itemize
8399 \begin_layout Itemize
8403 \begin_layout Standard
8405 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8413 Figures and tables in
8417 are not affected by this.
8422 Have a look at section
8423 \begin_inset space ~
8427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8429 reference "sec:Floats"
8433 for more information about
8440 \begin_layout Standard
8441 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8442 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8446 \begin_layout Standard
8447 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8455 of its own, it behaves just like a
8456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8463 paragraph environment.
8464 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8468 \begin_layout Standard
8469 Here's an example with a table:
8472 \begin_layout Enumerate
8477 \begin_layout Enumerate
8478 This is (a) and it's nested.
8482 \begin_layout Standard
8483 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8489 \begin_layout Standard
8491 \begin_inset Tabular
8492 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8493 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8494 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8495 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8579 \begin_layout Standard
8580 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8587 \begin_layout Enumerate
8589 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8593 \begin_layout Enumerate
8597 \begin_layout Standard
8598 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8601 \begin_layout Enumerate
8606 \begin_layout Enumerate
8607 This is (a) and it's nested.
8611 \begin_layout Standard
8612 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8618 \begin_layout Standard
8620 \begin_inset Tabular
8621 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8622 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8623 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8624 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8708 \begin_layout Standard
8709 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8715 \begin_layout Enumerate
8722 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8725 \begin_layout Enumerate
8729 \begin_layout Standard
8730 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8734 \begin_layout Standard
8735 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8737 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8740 \begin_layout Enumerate
8745 \begin_layout Enumerate
8746 This is (a) and it's nested.
8749 \begin_layout Standard
8750 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8756 \begin_layout Standard
8758 \begin_inset Tabular
8759 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8760 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8761 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8762 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8847 \begin_layout Standard
8848 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8854 \begin_layout Enumerate
8856 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8863 \begin_layout Enumerate
8867 \begin_layout Standard
8868 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8874 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8875 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8879 \begin_layout Subsection
8880 Usage and General Features
8883 \begin_layout Standard
8884 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8893 is the innermost possible depth.
8894 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8897 \begin_layout Enumerate
8898 level #1 – outermost
8902 \begin_layout Enumerate
8907 \begin_layout Enumerate
8912 \begin_layout Enumerate
8917 \begin_layout Itemize
8922 \begin_layout Itemize
8931 \begin_layout Standard
8932 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8933 both of them in the example.
8934 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8944 For example, if we tried to nest another
8949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8956 , we would get errors.
8959 \begin_layout Subsection
8961 \begin_inset Index idx
8964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8973 \begin_layout Standard
8974 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
8975 We have several examples of nested environments.
8976 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
8980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8981 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
8984 \begin_layout Labeling
8985 \labelwidthstring MMM
8986 #1-a This is the outermost level.
8995 \begin_layout Labeling
8996 \labelwidthstring MMM
8997 #2-a This is level #2.
8998 We created it by using
9001 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9007 arg "depth-increment"
9014 \begin_layout Labeling
9015 \labelwidthstring MMM
9016 #3-a This is level #3.
9017 This time, we just enter
9024 arg "depth-increment"
9028 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9032 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9038 arg "depth-increment"
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9050 environment, nested inside of
9051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9059 So, it's at level #4.
9060 We did this by entering
9063 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9069 arg "depth-increment"
9072 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9077 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9093 \begin_layout Standard
9098 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9101 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9107 \begin_layout Labeling
9108 \labelwidthstring MMM
9109 #4-a This is level #4.
9113 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9116 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9121 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9125 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9130 keep nesting things inside
9131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9142 \begin_layout Labeling
9143 \labelwidthstring MMM
9144 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9149 \begin_layout Labeling
9150 \labelwidthstring MMM
9151 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9152 and this is level #6.
9153 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9157 \begin_layout Labeling
9158 \labelwidthstring MMM
9159 #5-b Back to level #5.
9163 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9169 arg "depth-decrement"
9176 \begin_layout Labeling
9177 \labelwidthstring MMM
9181 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9187 arg "depth-decrement"
9190 , we're back at level #4.
9194 \begin_layout Labeling
9195 \labelwidthstring MMM
9196 #3-b Back to level #3.
9197 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9201 \begin_layout Labeling
9202 \labelwidthstring MMM
9203 #2-b Back to level #2.
9208 \begin_layout Labeling
9209 \labelwidthstring MMM
9210 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9211 After this sentence, we will enter
9215 and change the paragraph environment back to
9222 \begin_layout Standard
9223 We could have also used the
9239 environment in place of the
9244 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9247 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9248 Example 2: Inheritance
9251 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9252 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9255 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9264 arg "depth-increment"
9268 \begin_inset Newline newline
9271 which, we will change to the
9279 \begin_layout Enumerate
9284 environment, at level #2.
9287 \begin_layout Enumerate
9288 Notice how the nested
9292 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9296 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9300 \begin_layout Standard
9301 We ended this example by entering
9306 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9310 and reset the nesting depth by using
9313 arg "depth-decrement"
9319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9320 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9329 \begin_inset Argument 1
9332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9333 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9341 \begin_layout Enumerate
9342 This is level #1, in an
9346 paragraph environment.
9347 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9351 \begin_layout Enumerate
9356 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9362 arg "depth-increment"
9366 Now, what happens if we nest an
9370 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9371 label be? An asterisk?
9375 \begin_layout Itemize
9385 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9386 So, its label is a bullet.
9387 (We got here by using
9390 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9396 arg "depth-increment"
9399 , then changing the environment to
9407 \begin_layout Itemize
9408 Here's level #4, produced using
9411 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9417 arg "depth-increment"
9421 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9426 \begin_layout Enumerate
9427 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9429 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9434 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9438 , because we are in the
9446 environment (that is, it is an
9461 \begin_layout Enumerate
9466 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9467 type of numbering does LyX use?
9470 \begin_layout Enumerate
9471 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9474 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9477 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9480 \begin_layout Enumerate
9484 arg "depth-decrement"
9487 to decrease the depth after the next
9490 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9497 \begin_layout Enumerate
9499 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9503 \begin_layout Enumerate
9505 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9506 numeral as the label.Why?
9509 \begin_layout Enumerate
9510 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9519 Notice, however, that LyX
9523 reset the counter for the label.
9527 \begin_layout Enumerate
9531 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9537 arg "depth-decrement"
9540 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9541 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9542 into the twofold-nested
9550 \begin_layout Enumerate
9551 The same thing happens if we do another
9554 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9560 arg "depth-decrement"
9563 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9566 \begin_layout Standard
9567 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9572 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9586 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9592 The same rule applies for the
9596 environment, as well.
9599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9600 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9603 \begin_layout Enumerate
9604 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9605 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9606 the same detail with how we did it.
9615 \begin_layout Standard
9623 arg "depth-increment"
9630 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9631 the example in parentheses someplace.
9632 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9633 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9634 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9638 \begin_layout Enumerate
9643 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9648 Now we will add verse.
9649 \begin_inset Newline newline
9652 It will get much worse.
9653 \begin_inset Newline newline
9663 arg "depth-increment"
9674 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9675 \begin_inset Newline newline
9678 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9679 \begin_inset Newline newline
9685 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9698 \begin_layout Standard
9699 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9705 \begin_layout Standard
9707 \begin_inset Tabular
9708 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9709 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9710 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9711 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9800 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9810 arg "depth-increment"
9816 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9826 arg "depth-decrement"
9833 \begin_layout Enumerate
9838 : level #1) This is another item.
9839 Note that selecting a
9843 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9844 3 times to put the table inside the
9852 \begin_layout Quotation
9853 We're now ending the
9857 list and changing to
9862 We're still at level #1.
9863 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9864 The next set of paragraphs is a
9865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9872 We will nest both the
9879 \begin_inset space ~
9884 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9888 for the letter body.
9892 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9895 to preserve the depth.
9896 Remember that you need to use
9899 arg "newline-insert newline"
9902 to create multiple lines inside the
9909 \begin_inset space ~
9919 \begin_layout Right Address
9921 \begin_inset Newline newline
9924 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9925 \begin_inset Newline newline
9931 \begin_layout Address
9933 \begin_inset space ~
9939 \begin_layout Quotation
9940 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9944 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9945 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9946 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9947 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9948 as soon as possible.
9949 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9952 \begin_layout Quotation
9953 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9954 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9955 with your order, along with payment.
9958 \begin_layout Quotation
9959 We thank you again for your patience.
9962 \begin_layout Address
9964 \begin_inset Newline newline
9971 \begin_layout Quotation
9972 That ends that example!
9975 \begin_layout Standard
9976 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
9977 just a few keystrokes.
9978 We could have easily nested an
9999 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10002 \begin_layout Section
10003 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10004 \begin_inset Index idx
10007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10016 \begin_layout Standard
10017 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10018 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10019 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10020 be broken at the end of a line.
10021 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10025 \begin_layout Subsection
10027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10029 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10034 \begin_inset Index idx
10037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10046 \begin_layout Standard
10047 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10048 line at that point.
10049 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10052 \begin_layout Quote
10053 Further documentation is given in section
10054 \begin_inset Newline newline
10058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10060 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10068 \begin_layout Standard
10069 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10084 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10093 A protected space is set with
10095 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10096 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10098 \begin_inset space ~
10106 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10112 \begin_layout Subsection
10114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10116 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10121 \begin_inset Index idx
10124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10125 Spacing ! Horizontal
10133 \begin_layout Standard
10134 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10136 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10137 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10141 The length units are listed in Appendix
10142 \begin_inset space ~
10146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10148 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10155 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10159 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10164 \begin_inset Index idx
10167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10168 Spaces ! Inter-word
10176 \begin_layout Standard
10177 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10178 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10179 at the ends of sentences.
10180 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10181 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10182 followed by a period; see section
10183 \begin_inset space ~
10187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10189 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10194 To insert a normal space, select
10196 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10197 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10199 \begin_inset space ~
10207 arg "space-insert normal"
10213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10217 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10222 \begin_inset Index idx
10225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10234 \begin_layout Standard
10236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10243 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10252 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10253 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10254 inside abbreviations:
10257 \begin_layout Quote
10259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10263 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10266 \begin_layout Standard
10267 or between values and units.
10268 Compare for example this:
10269 \begin_inset Newline newline
10273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10277 \begin_inset Newline newline
10280 10 kg (normal space
10283 \begin_layout Standard
10284 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10286 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10287 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10289 \begin_inset space ~
10297 arg "space-insert thin"
10303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10307 \begin_layout Standard
10308 You can also insert the following space types:
10311 \begin_layout Description
10313 \begin_inset space ~
10317 \begin_inset space ~
10320 space A line with a
10321 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10325 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10329 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10332 negative thin space between the arrows.
10335 \begin_layout Description
10337 \begin_inset space ~
10341 \begin_inset space ~
10344 space A line with a
10345 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10349 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10353 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10356 negative medium space between the arrows.
10359 \begin_layout Description
10361 \begin_inset space ~
10365 \begin_inset space ~
10368 space A line with a
10369 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10373 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10377 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10380 negative thick space between the arrows.
10383 \begin_layout Description
10385 \begin_inset space ~
10389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10393 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10397 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10401 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10405 \begin_inset space ~
10409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10412 em) space between the arrows.
10415 \begin_layout Description
10417 \begin_inset space ~
10421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10425 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10429 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10433 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10437 \begin_inset space ~
10441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10444 em) space between the arrows.
10447 \begin_layout Description
10449 \begin_inset space ~
10453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10457 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10461 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10465 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10469 \begin_inset space ~
10473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10476 em) space between the arrows.
10479 \begin_layout Description
10481 \begin_inset space ~
10485 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10489 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10494 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10501 cm space between the arrows.
10504 \begin_layout Standard
10506 \begin_inset space ~
10510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10512 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10516 lists the different space sizes.
10519 \begin_layout Standard
10520 \begin_inset Float table
10525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10526 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10531 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10535 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10545 \begin_inset Tabular
10546 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10547 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10548 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10549 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10665 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10828 \begin_inset Index idx
10831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10840 \begin_layout Standard
10841 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10842 in a uniform fashion.
10843 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10844 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10845 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10846 equally between themselves.
10849 \begin_layout Standard
10850 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10853 \begin_layout Quote
10855 This is on the left side
10856 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10859 This is on the right
10862 \begin_layout Quote
10865 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10869 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10875 \begin_layout Quote
10878 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10882 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10886 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10892 \begin_layout Standard
10893 That was an example in the
10899 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10903 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10907 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10910 is one in a standard paragraph.
10911 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10915 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10918 \begin_layout Standard
10919 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10922 \begin_inset space ~
10927 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10930 \begin_layout Standard
10932 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10936 \begin_inset space ~
10942 \begin_layout Standard
10944 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10948 \begin_inset space ~
10954 \begin_layout Standard
10956 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10960 \begin_inset space ~
10966 \begin_layout Standard
10968 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10972 \begin_inset space ~
10978 \begin_layout Standard
10980 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10984 \begin_inset space ~
10990 \begin_layout Standard
10992 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10996 \begin_inset space ~
11002 \begin_layout Standard
11003 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11011 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11015 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11016 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11017 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11021 option in the space dialog.
11029 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11033 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11038 \begin_inset Index idx
11041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11050 \begin_layout Standard
11051 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11052 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11055 \begin_layout Standard
11056 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11059 What is correct English?:
11060 \begin_inset Newline newline
11064 \begin_inset Newline newline
11068 \begin_inset space ~
11071 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11072 \begin_inset Newline newline
11076 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11087 \begin_inset Newline newline
11091 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11102 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11108 \begin_layout Standard
11110 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11115 \begin_inset space ~
11119 \begin_inset space ~
11123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11127 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11129 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11130 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11134 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11140 \begin_inset space ~
11144 \begin_inset space ~
11148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11151 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11160 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11161 That is why it is named
11162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11170 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11171 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11175 \begin_layout Subsection
11177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11179 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11184 \begin_inset Index idx
11187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11196 \begin_layout Standard
11197 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11199 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11200 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11202 \begin_inset space ~
11208 There you find the following sizes:
11211 \begin_layout Standard
11224 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11229 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11231 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11232 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11234 \begin_inset space ~
11240 \begin_inset Index idx
11243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11244 Document ! Settings
11249 for the paragraph separation.
11250 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11261 \begin_layout Standard
11267 \begin_inset Index idx
11270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11276 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11277 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11282 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11283 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11292 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11301 s are described in section
11302 \begin_inset space ~
11306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11308 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11317 If there are several
11321 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11322 You can therefore use
11326 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11329 \begin_layout Standard
11334 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11335 \begin_inset space ~
11339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11341 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11348 \begin_layout Standard
11349 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11360 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11372 \begin_layout Subsection
11373 Paragraph Alignment
11374 \begin_inset Index idx
11377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11378 Paragraph ! Alignment
11386 \begin_layout Standard
11387 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11389 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11392 dialog (toolbar button
11395 arg "layout-paragraph"
11399 There are five possibilities:
11402 \begin_layout Itemize
11410 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11416 \begin_layout Itemize
11424 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11430 \begin_layout Itemize
11438 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11444 \begin_layout Itemize
11452 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11458 \begin_layout Itemize
11466 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11472 \begin_layout Standard
11473 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11474 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11475 the left and right margins.
11476 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11479 \begin_layout Standard
11481 This paragraph is right aligned,
11484 \begin_layout Standard
11486 this one is centered,
11489 \begin_layout Standard
11491 this one is left aligned.
11494 \begin_layout Subsection
11496 \begin_inset Index idx
11499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11500 Page breaks ! Forced
11506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11508 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11515 \begin_layout Standard
11516 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11517 can force a page break where you want one.
11518 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11519 Only if you use a lot of
11523 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11526 \begin_layout Standard
11527 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11528 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11532 have to change the page breaking.
11535 \begin_layout Standard
11536 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11538 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11540 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11541 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11543 \begin_inset space ~
11549 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11551 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11552 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11554 \begin_inset space ~
11559 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11561 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11562 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11565 \begin_layout Standard
11566 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11567 at the top of a page.
11568 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11569 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11570 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11571 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11575 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11579 to learn more about
11586 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11590 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11595 \begin_inset Index idx
11598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11599 Page breaks ! Clear
11607 \begin_layout Standard
11608 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11609 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11610 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11611 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11612 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11615 \begin_layout Standard
11616 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11618 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11619 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11621 \begin_inset space ~
11627 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11629 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11630 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11632 \begin_inset space ~
11636 \begin_inset space ~
11641 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11642 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11645 \begin_layout Subsection
11647 \begin_inset Index idx
11650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11659 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11666 \begin_layout Standard
11667 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11669 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11671 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11672 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11674 \begin_inset space ~
11678 \begin_inset space ~
11686 arg "newline-insert newline"
11690 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11692 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11693 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11695 \begin_inset space ~
11699 \begin_inset space ~
11707 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11710 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11712 This is useful to avoid
11713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11720 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11723 \begin_layout Standard
11724 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11725 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11726 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11727 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11728 \begin_inset space ~
11732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11734 reference "sec:Quote"
11739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11741 reference "sec:Verse"
11746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11748 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11755 \begin_layout Subsection
11757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11759 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11764 \begin_inset Index idx
11767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11776 \begin_layout Standard
11778 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11789 \begin_layout Standard
11793 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11794 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11796 \begin_inset space ~
11801 you can insert horizontal lines.
11802 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11803 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11804 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11807 \begin_layout Standard
11809 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11820 \begin_layout Section
11821 Characters and Symbols
11824 \begin_layout Standard
11825 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11826 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11827 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11835 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11839 for information on how this is done.
11842 \begin_layout Standard
11843 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11848 dialog via the menu
11850 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11851 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11857 \begin_layout Standard
11858 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11866 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11867 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11868 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11876 \begin_layout Section
11877 Fonts and Text Styles
11878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11880 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11887 \begin_layout Subsection
11889 \begin_inset Index idx
11892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11901 \begin_layout Standard
11902 There are two types of fonts:
11905 \begin_layout Description
11907 \begin_inset space ~
11911 \begin_inset Index idx
11914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11920 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11925 characters) in the font.
11926 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11927 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11928 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11929 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11930 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11931 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11932 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11933 \begin_inset Newline newline
11936 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11937 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11938 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11939 sizes than at small ones.
11940 \begin_inset Newline newline
11954 \begin_inset space ~
11962 \begin_layout Description
11964 \begin_inset space ~
11968 \begin_inset Index idx
11971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11977 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
11978 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11979 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11980 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11981 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
11982 image manipulation program.
11983 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11984 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
11985 \begin_inset space ~
11988 pixels high up to 34
11989 \begin_inset space ~
11992 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11993 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11994 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
11996 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11997 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11998 \begin_inset Newline newline
12001 Bitmap fonts are named
12004 \begin_inset space ~
12009 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12012 \begin_layout Standard
12013 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12014 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12015 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12016 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12017 use scalable fonts.
12020 \begin_layout Standard
12021 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12024 \begin_layout Standard
12025 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12026 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12027 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12028 font to emphasize text, you use an
12029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12037 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12038 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12042 \begin_layout Subsection
12044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12046 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12054 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12055 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12056 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12058 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12059 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12060 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12061 to a word processor.
12062 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12063 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12064 across different machines.
12065 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12066 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12068 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
12070 \begin_inset space ~
12074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12076 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12081 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
12082 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
12086 \begin_layout Standard
12087 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12088 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12090 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12091 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12092 that is installed on your system.
12093 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12096 \begin_layout Standard
12097 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12105 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12106 es; so you might have to experiment.
12114 \begin_layout Standard
12115 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12123 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12124 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12132 \begin_layout Subsection
12133 Document Font and Font size
12134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12136 name "sub:Document-Font"
12141 \begin_inset Index idx
12144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12151 \begin_inset Index idx
12154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12163 \begin_layout Standard
12164 You can set the document fonts in the
12166 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12170 \begin_inset Index idx
12173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12174 Document ! Settings
12184 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12185 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12188 \begin_inset space ~
12197 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12198 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
12199 with the roman font.
12202 \begin_layout Standard
12209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12218 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12219 This requires that you use
12225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12264 as the output format, i.
12265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12269 \begin_inset space \space{}
12272 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12273 \begin_inset space ~
12277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12279 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12284 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12285 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12287 \begin_inset space ~
12290 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12291 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12292 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12294 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12297 \begin_layout Standard
12298 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12303 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12308 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12309 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12316 \begin_inset space ~
12322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12335 European Computer Modern
12338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12345 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12348 \begin_layout Standard
12357 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12358 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12363 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12366 \begin_inset space ~
12371 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12377 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12378 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12381 \begin_layout Itemize
12385 \begin_inset space ~
12390 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12403 \begin_inset space ~
12408 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12412 as the default font.
12413 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12414 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12417 \begin_inset space ~
12430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12431 One difference is improved kerning.
12439 \begin_layout Itemize
12443 \begin_inset space ~
12447 \begin_inset space ~
12452 fonts in (the rare) case that
12455 \begin_inset space ~
12460 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12475 Virtual means that it
12476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12487 -glyphs from other fonts.
12488 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12510 Loading the LaTeX-package
12515 \begin_inset Index idx
12518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12519 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12524 with the document preamble line
12525 \begin_inset Newline newline
12532 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12533 \begin_inset Newline newline
12538 will fix the guillemet problem.
12543 and that accented characters are not
12547 glyph, but built of
12551 characters, the accent and the letter.
12552 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12558 If you search for example for the French word
12559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12566 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12575 and not for the glyph
12576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12580 \begin_inset space ~
12584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12590 \begin_layout Itemize
12591 If you do not like the look of
12599 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12604 \begin_inset space ~
12610 \begin_inset space ~
12620 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12621 \begin_inset space ~
12624 serif and typewriter fonts,
12628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12629 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12636 \begin_inset space ~
12645 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12650 \begin_inset space \space{}
12658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12662 \begin_inset space \space{}
12668 \begin_inset space ~
12676 \begin_inset space ~
12686 but you can also select your own.
12687 \begin_inset Newline newline
12690 The differences between roman,
12693 \begin_inset space ~
12702 fonts are explained in section
12703 \begin_inset space ~
12707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12709 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12714 \begin_inset Newline newline
12720 \begin_inset space ~
12725 was originally designed for newspapers.
12726 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12727 into the small newspaper columns.
12731 \begin_inset space ~
12736 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12739 \begin_layout Standard
12740 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12753 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12758 depends on the class you are using.
12759 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12762 \begin_layout Standard
12763 Note that the font size is the
12768 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12769 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12770 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12773 \begin_inset space ~
12779 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12780 \begin_inset space ~
12784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12786 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12793 \begin_layout Standard
12797 \begin_inset space ~
12802 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12804 \begin_inset space ~
12807 serif or typewriter.
12812 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12822 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12825 \begin_layout Standard
12834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12843 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12849 \begin_inset Index idx
12852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12853 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12859 \begin_inset space ~
12863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12865 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12870 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12871 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12878 \begin_layout Standard
12879 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12881 Use Old Style Figures
12885 Use True Small Caps
12888 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12891 Use Old Style Figures
12893 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12895 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12903 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12907 Use True Small Caps
12909 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12910 of scaled capitals.
12911 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12912 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12915 \begin_layout Standard
12920 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12921 a font to display the script characters.
12925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12926 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12931 \begin_inset Index idx
12934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12935 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12940 So this has no effect for the document language
12954 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12958 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12966 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12970 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12971 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12972 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12974 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12977 dialog, see section
12978 \begin_inset space ~
12982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12984 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12996 \begin_layout Subsection
12997 Using Different Character Styles
12998 \begin_inset Index idx
13001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13008 \begin_inset Index idx
13011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13020 \begin_layout Standard
13021 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13022 certain paragraph environments.
13023 LyX supports two character styles,
13032 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
13036 \begin_layout Standard
13041 style, do one of the following:
13044 \begin_layout Itemize
13045 click on the toolbar button
13054 \begin_layout Itemize
13055 use the key binding
13064 \begin_layout Standard
13065 These commands are all toggles.
13070 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13073 \begin_layout Standard
13074 One typically uses the
13078 style for proper names.
13080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13087 is the original author of LyX.
13088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13094 \begin_layout Standard
13095 A more widely used character style is the
13100 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13107 \begin_layout Itemize
13108 clicking on the toolbar button
13117 \begin_layout Itemize
13118 using the keybindings
13127 \begin_layout Standard
13132 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13133 es use a different font.
13136 \begin_layout Standard
13137 We've been using the
13141 style all over the place in this document.
13142 Here's one more example:
13145 \begin_layout Quotation
13148 Do not overuse character styles!
13151 \begin_layout Standard
13152 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13153 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13154 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13155 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13159 \begin_layout Standard
13160 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13168 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13170 \begin_inset space ~
13173 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13179 arg "dialog-show character"
13185 \begin_layout Subsection
13186 Fine-Tuning with the
13191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13193 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13198 \begin_inset Index idx
13201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13210 \begin_layout Standard
13211 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13212 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13213 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13214 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13215 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13216 from ordinary dialog.
13219 \begin_layout Standard
13220 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13221 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13222 \begin_inset Newline newline
13225 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13226 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13229 \begin_layout Standard
13230 To use custom character styles, open the
13232 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13234 \begin_inset space ~
13237 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13240 dialog or press the toolbar button
13243 arg "dialog-show character"
13247 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13248 font property that you can choose.
13249 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13252 \begin_inset space ~
13257 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13262 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13263 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13264 environments all at once.
13267 \begin_layout Standard
13268 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13271 \begin_inset space ~
13283 \begin_layout Labeling
13284 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13298 The possible options are:
13302 \begin_layout Labeling
13303 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13308 This is the Roman font family.
13309 Normally a serif font.
13310 It's also the default family.
13320 \begin_layout Labeling
13321 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13325 \begin_inset space ~
13332 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13344 \begin_layout Labeling
13345 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13352 This is the Typewriter font family.
13358 arg "font-typewriter"
13367 \begin_layout Labeling
13368 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13373 This corresponds to the print weight.
13378 \begin_layout Labeling
13379 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13384 This is the Medium font series.
13385 It's also the default series.
13388 \begin_layout Labeling
13389 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13396 This is the Bold font series.
13409 \begin_layout Labeling
13410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13415 As the name implies.
13420 \begin_layout Labeling
13421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13426 This is the Upright font shape.
13427 It's also the default shape.
13430 \begin_layout Labeling
13431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13445 s the Italic font shape
13451 \begin_layout Labeling
13452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13459 This is the Slanted font shape
13461 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13464 \begin_layout Labeling
13465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13469 \begin_inset space ~
13476 This is the Small caps font shape
13483 \begin_layout Labeling
13484 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13489 Alters the text color.
13490 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13494 \begin_inset space ~
13499 , which means that the document default color set in
13501 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13502 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13508 \begin_inset space ~
13513 is used, you can choose between
13546 \begin_inset Index idx
13549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13558 \begin_layout Labeling
13559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13564 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13565 the language of the document.
13566 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13568 \begin_inset Newline newline
13571 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13572 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13573 When using the spell checking (see section
13574 \begin_inset space ~
13578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13580 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13584 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13587 \begin_layout Labeling
13588 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13593 Alters the size of the font.
13594 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13595 proportional to the document font size.
13596 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13597 what you want to do.
13602 \begin_layout Labeling
13603 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13624 arg "font-size tiny"
13630 \begin_layout Labeling
13631 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13652 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13658 \begin_layout Labeling
13659 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13680 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13686 \begin_layout Labeling
13687 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13708 arg "font-size small"
13714 \begin_layout Labeling
13715 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13729 It's also the default size.
13733 arg "font-size normal"
13739 \begin_layout Labeling
13740 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13761 arg "font-size large"
13767 \begin_layout Labeling
13768 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13789 arg "font-size larger"
13795 \begin_layout Labeling
13796 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13817 arg "font-size largest"
13823 \begin_layout Labeling
13824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13845 arg "font-size huge"
13851 \begin_layout Labeling
13852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13873 arg "font-size giant"
13879 \begin_layout Labeling
13880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13885 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13905 arg "font-size increase"
13911 \begin_layout Labeling
13912 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13917 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13937 arg "font-size decrease"
13944 \begin_layout Standard
13949 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13950 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13951 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13952 — use those instead.
13953 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13956 \begin_layout Labeling
13957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13962 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13967 \begin_layout Labeling
13968 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13975 This is text with emphasize on
13978 This might seem like the same as
13982 , but it is actually a bit different.
13988 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13990 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13993 \begin_layout Labeling
13994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14001 This is text with Underbar on.
14007 arg "font-underline"
14013 \begin_inset Newline newline
14018 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14019 when you could not change fonts.
14020 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14021 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14025 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14028 \begin_layout Labeling
14029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14033 \begin_inset space ~
14040 This is text with Double underbar on.
14046 arg "font-underunderline"
14050 \begin_inset Newline newline
14053 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14054 about double underbar.
14057 \begin_layout Labeling
14058 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14062 \begin_inset space ~
14069 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14075 arg "font-underwave"
14079 \begin_inset Newline newline
14082 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14083 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14086 \begin_layout Labeling
14087 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14094 This is text with Strikeout on.
14100 arg "font-strikeout"
14104 \begin_inset Newline newline
14107 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14108 changed in the meantime.
14111 \begin_layout Labeling
14112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14119 This is text with Noun on.
14126 , this is a logical attribute.
14127 Normally it's equivalent to
14130 \begin_inset space ~
14139 \begin_layout Standard
14140 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14141 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14143 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14145 \begin_inset space ~
14148 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14154 arg "dialog-show character"
14157 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14158 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14161 arg "textstyle-apply"
14165 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14169 \begin_layout Standard
14170 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14177 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14178 (suppose you just set the shape to
14179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14197 \begin_inset space ~
14209 \begin_layout Standard
14210 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14218 \begin_inset space ~
14230 \begin_layout Itemize
14236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14243 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14261 \begin_inset Newline newline
14265 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14279 \begin_inset Note Note
14282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14283 For more on phantoms see section
14284 \begin_inset space ~
14288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14290 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14300 \begin_inset Newline newline
14306 \begin_layout Itemize
14311 fonts use characters with serifs.
14312 These are the small
14313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14320 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14321 The following example shows the difference:
14322 \begin_inset Newline newline
14326 \begin_inset Newline newline
14331 text without serifs
14334 \begin_inset Newline newline
14337 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14338 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14345 \begin_layout Itemize
14350 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14351 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14352 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14355 \begin_layout Standard
14356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14363 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14364 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14367 \begin_inset space ~
14372 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14373 the property to be removed.
14374 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14375 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14376 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14394 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14395 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14403 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14407 \begin_inset space ~
14412 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14423 If you, for example, set
14424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14442 \begin_inset space ~
14447 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14456 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14459 \begin_layout Standard
14460 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14461 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14464 \begin_layout Section
14465 Printing and Previewing
14468 \begin_layout Subsection
14472 \begin_layout Standard
14473 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14474 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14475 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14476 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14477 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14479 Additional Features
14484 \begin_layout Standard
14485 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14486 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14487 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14488 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14489 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14490 This happens in two stages:
14493 \begin_layout Enumerate
14494 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14495 generating a file with the extension,
14496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14510 \begin_layout Enumerate
14511 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14515 file to produce printable output.
14518 \begin_layout Subsection
14519 Output file formats
14520 \begin_inset Index idx
14523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14532 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14539 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14540 Simple text (ASCII)
14541 \begin_inset Index idx
14544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14545 File formats ! ASCII
14553 \begin_layout Standard
14554 This file type has the extension
14555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14567 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14571 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14578 \begin_layout Standard
14579 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14581 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14582 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14584 \begin_inset space ~
14590 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14591 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14592 \begin_inset space ~
14596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14598 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14603 If your document includes such material, use
14605 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14606 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14608 \begin_inset space ~
14612 \begin_inset space ~
14616 \begin_inset space ~
14624 \begin_inset space ~
14628 \begin_inset space ~
14634 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14635 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14638 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14640 \begin_inset Index idx
14643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14644 File formats ! LaTeX
14652 \begin_layout Standard
14653 This file type has the extension
14654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14665 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14667 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14668 it manually with console commands.
14669 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14670 you view or export your document.
14673 \begin_layout Standard
14674 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14676 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14677 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14692 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14693 \begin_inset space ~
14697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14699 reference "sub:Export"
14706 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14708 \begin_inset Index idx
14711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14720 \begin_layout Standard
14721 This file type has the extension
14722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14742 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14743 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14744 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14748 \begin_layout Standard
14749 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14750 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14751 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14752 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14753 when you view the DVI.
14754 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14757 \begin_layout Standard
14758 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14760 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14761 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14766 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14767 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14769 \begin_inset space ~
14776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14786 The latter option uses the program
14795 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14796 font access (see section
14797 \begin_inset space ~
14801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14803 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14808 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14809 standard TeX processor.
14812 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14814 \begin_inset Index idx
14817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14818 File formats ! PostScript
14826 \begin_layout Standard
14827 This file type has the extension
14828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14840 PostScript was developed by the company
14844 as a printer language.
14845 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14847 PostScript can be seen as a
14848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14851 programming language
14852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14855 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14860 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
14866 \begin_inset Index idx
14869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14870 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14880 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14883 \begin_layout Standard
14884 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14888 Encapsulated PostScript
14889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14892 (EPS, file extension
14893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14905 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14906 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14907 If, for example, you have 50
14908 \begin_inset space ~
14911 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14912 \begin_inset space ~
14915 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14916 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14917 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14918 EPS to avoid this problem.
14921 \begin_layout Standard
14922 You can export to PostScript using the menu
14924 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14925 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14931 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14933 \begin_inset Index idx
14936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14943 \begin_inset Index idx
14946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14955 \begin_layout Standard
14956 This file type has the extension
14957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14973 Portable Document Format
14974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14981 was derived from PostScript.
14982 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14991 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
14992 looks exactly the same.
14995 \begin_layout Standard
14996 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15000 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15004 (JPG, file extension
15005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15032 Portable Network Graphics
15033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15036 (PNG, file extension
15037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15049 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15050 background to one of these formats.
15051 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15052 will slow down your workflow.
15053 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15056 \begin_layout Standard
15057 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15059 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15065 \begin_layout Description
15067 \begin_inset space ~
15070 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15074 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15077 \begin_layout Description
15079 \begin_inset space ~
15086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15093 X) This uses the program
15097 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15102 is a new engine, derived from
15106 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15107 access (see section
15108 \begin_inset space ~
15112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15114 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15119 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15120 standard TeX processor.
15123 \begin_layout Description
15125 \begin_inset space ~
15132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15139 X) This uses the program
15143 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15148 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15149 font access (see section
15150 \begin_inset space ~
15154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15156 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15161 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15162 vertically written Japanese.
15165 \begin_layout Description
15167 \begin_inset space ~
15170 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15174 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15178 \begin_layout Description
15180 \begin_inset space ~
15183 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15187 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15188 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15192 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15193 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15196 \begin_layout Standard
15200 \begin_inset space ~
15209 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15210 works without problems.
15211 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15212 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15216 \begin_inset space ~
15223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15235 \begin_inset space ~
15242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15251 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15261 \begin_inset Index idx
15264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15265 FileFormats ! XHTML
15271 \begin_inset Index idx
15274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15283 \begin_layout Standard
15284 This file type has the extension
15285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15297 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15298 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15299 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15300 suitable for the purpose.
15301 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15303 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15304 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15307 between different formats, which are described in section
15309 Math Output in XHTML
15314 \begin_inset space ~
15322 \begin_layout Standard
15323 XHTML output remains
15324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15331 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15334 LyX and the World Wide Web
15338 Additional Features
15340 manual, for more information.
15343 \begin_layout Standard
15344 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15346 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15347 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15353 \begin_layout Subsection
15355 \begin_inset Index idx
15358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15367 \begin_layout Standard
15368 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15369 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15378 or use the toolbar button
15385 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15386 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15393 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15397 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15405 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15410 Further output formats can be selected via
15412 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15413 View (Other Formats)
15415 or the toolbar button
15416 \begin_inset Graphics
15417 filename ../images/view-others.png
15419 groupId toolbarbuttons
15426 \begin_layout Standard
15427 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15428 viewer window using the menu
15430 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15435 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15436 Update (Other Formats)
15441 \begin_layout Standard
15442 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15444 To have a real output, export your document.
15447 \begin_layout Subsection
15448 Printing the File from within LyX
15449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15451 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15458 \begin_layout Standard
15459 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15460 it directly from within LyX.
15461 To print a file, select the menu
15463 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15469 arg "dialog-show print"
15472 ) or click on the toolbar button
15475 arg "dialog-show print"
15479 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15480 This file is then processed by the program
15484 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15489 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15492 \begin_layout Standard
15493 You can set the following print parameters in the
15496 \begin_inset space ~
15504 \begin_layout Labeling
15505 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15510 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15515 Note that this printer name is for the program
15524 has to be configured for this printer name.
15525 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15526 \begin_inset space ~
15530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15532 reference "sub:Printer"
15541 The printer should understand PostScript.
15544 \begin_layout Labeling
15545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15550 The name of a file to print to.
15551 The output will be a PostScript file.
15552 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15556 \begin_layout Standard
15557 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15558 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15559 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15560 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15561 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15562 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15563 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15566 \begin_layout Section
15567 A few Words about Typography
15568 \begin_inset Index idx
15571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15580 \begin_layout Subsection
15581 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15582 \begin_inset Index idx
15585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15592 \begin_inset Index idx
15595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15604 \begin_layout Standard
15606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15617 character comes in four lengths: the
15629 , and the minus sign:
15630 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15636 \begin_layout Standard
15637 \begin_inset Tabular
15638 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15639 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15640 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15641 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15642 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15643 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15672 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15712 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15737 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15739 \begin_inset space ~
15742 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15749 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15774 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15776 \begin_inset space ~
15779 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15800 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15834 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15840 \begin_layout Standard
15841 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15853 character multiple times in a row.
15854 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15855 the final output, but not in LyX.
15857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15887 \begin_layout Standard
15888 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15889 math mode and has a length of its own.
15890 Here are some examples:
15893 \begin_layout Enumerate
15894 line- and page-breaks
15895 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15905 \begin_layout Enumerate
15907 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15917 \begin_layout Enumerate
15918 Oh — there's a dash.
15919 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15929 \begin_layout Enumerate
15930 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15934 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15944 \begin_layout Subsection
15946 \begin_inset Index idx
15949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15958 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15965 \begin_layout Standard
15966 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15967 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15972 \begin_inset Index idx
15975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15976 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15981 following the rules of the document language.
15984 \begin_layout Standard
15985 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
15990 font and with unusual constructs, like
15991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15999 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16001 This is done with the menu
16003 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16004 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16006 \begin_inset space ~
16012 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16013 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16016 \begin_layout Standard
16017 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16018 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16028 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16036 as a hyphenation possibility.
16037 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16038 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16039 as described in section
16040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16043 Prevent Hyphenation
16044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16050 \begin_inset space ~
16058 \begin_layout Subsection
16060 \begin_inset Index idx
16063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16073 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16076 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16083 \begin_layout Standard
16084 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16085 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16086 LaTeX then adds the
16087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16090 appropriate amount of space.
16091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16094 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16096 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16097 gets after another word.
16100 \begin_layout Standard
16101 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16102 not work in all cases.
16104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16115 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16116 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16119 \begin_layout Standard
16120 Here are some examples of
16124 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16127 \begin_layout Itemize
16132 \begin_layout Itemize
16137 \begin_layout Standard
16138 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16141 \begin_layout Itemize
16143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16147 this is too much space!
16150 \begin_layout Itemize
16155 \begin_layout Standard
16156 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16159 \begin_layout Standard
16160 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16163 \begin_layout Enumerate
16167 \begin_inset space ~
16172 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16173 \begin_inset space ~
16177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16179 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16184 \begin_inset Index idx
16187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16188 Spaces ! inter-word
16196 \begin_layout Enumerate
16200 \begin_inset space ~
16205 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16206 \begin_inset space ~
16210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16212 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16217 \begin_inset Index idx
16220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16229 \begin_layout Enumerate
16233 \begin_inset space ~
16237 \begin_inset space ~
16241 \begin_inset space ~
16248 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16250 \begin_inset space ~
16255 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16256 This function is also bound to
16259 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16265 \begin_layout Standard
16266 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16269 \begin_layout Itemize
16271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16275 \begin_inset space \space{}
16278 this is too much space!
16281 \begin_layout Itemize
16282 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16286 \begin_layout Standard
16287 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16288 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16289 will take care of this.
16292 \begin_layout Standard
16293 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16297 \begin_inset space ~
16302 feature described in the section
16308 Additional Features
16313 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16315 \begin_inset Index idx
16318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 Typography ! Quotes
16325 \begin_inset Index idx
16328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16359 \begin_layout Standard
16360 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16361 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16362 and use a closing quote at the end.
16364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16372 The keyboard character,
16376 , generates this automatically.
16379 \begin_layout Standard
16380 You can specify what character the
16384 key produces using the submenu
16390 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16394 \begin_inset Index idx
16397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16398 Document ! Settings
16408 There are six choices:
16411 \begin_layout Labeling
16412 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16435 \begin_layout Labeling
16436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16439 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16443 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16449 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16453 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16459 \begin_layout Labeling
16460 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16463 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16467 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16473 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16477 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16483 \begin_layout Labeling
16484 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16487 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16491 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16497 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16501 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16507 \begin_layout Labeling
16508 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16511 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16515 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16521 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16525 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16531 \begin_layout Labeling
16532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16535 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16539 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16545 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16549 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16555 \begin_layout Standard
16556 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16559 arg "quote-insert single"
16565 \begin_layout Subsection
16567 \begin_inset Index idx
16570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16571 Typography ! Ligatures
16577 \begin_inset Index idx
16580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16611 name "sub:Ligatures"
16618 \begin_layout Standard
16619 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16620 print them as single characters.
16621 These groups are known as
16626 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16628 Here are the standard ligatures:
16631 \begin_layout Itemize
16635 \begin_layout Itemize
16639 \begin_layout Itemize
16643 \begin_layout Itemize
16647 \begin_layout Itemize
16651 \begin_layout Standard
16652 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16655 \begin_layout Standard
16656 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16657 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16665 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16681 To break a ligature, use
16683 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16684 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16686 \begin_inset space ~
16693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16704 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16721 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16729 \begin_layout Subsection
16731 \begin_inset Index idx
16734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16743 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16750 \begin_layout Standard
16751 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16752 characters in different sizes and positions.
16753 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16754 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16774 \begin_inset Note Note
16777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16778 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
16779 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16784 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
16785 following proper names:
16788 \begin_layout Description
16789 LyX The name of the game, write
16790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16811 \begin_layout Description
16812 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16834 \begin_layout Description
16835 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16857 \begin_layout Description
16858 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16880 \begin_layout Standard
16881 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16886 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16894 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16895 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16896 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16899 : The actual version is
16900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16907 , the previous one was
16908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16918 \begin_layout Standard
16919 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
16920 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
16921 In LyX this will look like
16922 \begin_inset Graphics
16923 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16929 \begin_inset Newline newline
16932 For more about TeX Code, see section
16933 \begin_inset space ~
16937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16939 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16946 \begin_layout Subsection
16948 \begin_inset Index idx
16951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16960 \begin_layout Standard
16961 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16962 space between two words.
16963 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16973 for units use the menu
16975 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16976 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16978 \begin_inset space ~
16986 arg "space-insert thin"
16992 \begin_layout Standard
16993 Here is an example to show the differences:
16996 \begin_layout Standard
16997 \begin_inset Tabular
16998 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16999 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17000 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17001 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17008 \begin_inset space ~
17012 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17024 space between number and unit
17031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17036 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17040 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17052 half space between number and unit
17065 \begin_layout Subsection
17067 \begin_inset Index idx
17070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17071 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17079 \begin_layout Standard
17080 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17082 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17083 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17084 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17085 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17086 These bits of text became known as
17097 \begin_layout Standard
17098 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17099 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17100 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17101 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17102 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17103 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17104 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17105 \begin_inset Newline newline
17113 \begin_inset Newline newline
17121 \begin_inset Newline newline
17124 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17125 Some LaTeX books (such as
17126 \begin_inset space ~
17130 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17132 key "latexcompanion"
17137 \begin_inset space ~
17141 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17147 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17151 \begin_layout Chapter
17152 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17155 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17162 \begin_layout Standard
17163 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17166 \begin_inset space ~
17172 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17175 \begin_layout Section
17177 \begin_inset Index idx
17180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17196 \begin_layout Standard
17197 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17200 \begin_layout Description
17202 \begin_inset space ~
17205 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17206 \begin_inset Newline newline
17210 \begin_inset Note Note
17213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17214 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17222 \begin_layout Description
17223 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17224 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17226 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17227 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17240 \begin_inset space ~
17246 \begin_inset Newline newline
17250 \begin_inset Note Comment
17253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17254 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17262 \begin_layout Description
17264 \begin_inset space ~
17267 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17268 set in the document settings under
17270 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17272 \begin_inset space ~
17278 \begin_inset Newline newline
17282 \begin_inset Newline newline
17286 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17295 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17296 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17301 of a comment that appears in the output.
17307 \begin_inset Newline newline
17311 \begin_inset Newline newline
17314 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17317 \begin_layout Standard
17318 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17326 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17330 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17333 \begin_layout Section
17335 \begin_inset Index idx
17338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17347 name "sec:Footnotes"
17354 \begin_layout Standard
17355 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17358 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17361 or the toolbar button
17364 arg "footnote-insert"
17376 \begin_inset Graphics
17377 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17386 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17415 label, the box will
17419 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17420 Clicking on the box label again will close
17433 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17434 and click on the footnote
17449 \begin_layout Standard
17450 Here is an example footnote:
17458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17459 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17467 \begin_layout Standard
17468 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17469 position where the footnote box is placed.
17470 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17471 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17472 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17473 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17478 ey are described in the
17481 \begin_inset space ~
17489 \begin_layout Section
17491 \begin_inset Index idx
17494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17503 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17510 \begin_layout Standard
17511 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17512 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17514 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17516 \begin_inset space ~
17521 or the toolbar button
17524 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17550 appearing within your text.
17551 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17560 \begin_layout Standard
17561 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17565 \begin_inset Marginal
17568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17570 This is a marginal note.
17578 \begin_layout Standard
17579 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17580 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17581 pages, right on odd pages.
17584 \begin_layout Standard
17585 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17588 \begin_inset space ~
17596 \begin_inset space ~
17604 \begin_layout Section
17605 Graphics and Images
17606 \begin_inset Index idx
17609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17616 \begin_inset Index idx
17619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17628 name "sec:Graphics"
17635 \begin_layout Standard
17636 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17637 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17640 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17645 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17649 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17652 \begin_layout Standard
17653 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17658 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17659 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17661 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17662 \begin_inset space ~
17666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17668 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17675 \begin_layout Standard
17680 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17681 of the image in the output.
17682 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17686 \begin_inset space ~
17690 \begin_inset space ~
17699 \begin_inset space ~
17703 \begin_inset space ~
17707 \begin_inset space ~
17712 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17713 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17721 \begin_layout Standard
17728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17736 \begin_inset space ~
17740 \begin_inset space ~
17747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17756 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17757 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17761 \begin_inset space ~
17766 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17767 with the image size is printed.
17771 \begin_inset space ~
17775 \begin_inset space ~
17779 \begin_inset space ~
17784 is explained in the
17787 \begin_inset space ~
17799 \begin_layout Standard
17800 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17801 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17803 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17806 \begin_layout Standard
17808 \begin_inset Graphics
17809 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17817 \begin_layout Standard
17818 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17819 the image into a float, see section
17820 \begin_inset space ~
17824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17826 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17833 \begin_layout Subsection
17835 \begin_inset Index idx
17838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17847 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17854 \begin_layout Standard
17855 You can insert images in any known file format.
17856 But as we explained in section
17857 \begin_inset space ~
17861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17863 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17867 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17868 LyX therefore uses the program
17872 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17873 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17874 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17875 \begin_inset space ~
17879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17881 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17888 \begin_layout Standard
17889 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17892 \begin_layout Description
17894 \begin_inset space ~
17897 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17898 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17899 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17903 Graphics Interchange Format
17904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17907 (GIF, file extension
17908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17920 \begin_inset Index idx
17923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17955 Portable Network Graphics
17956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17959 (PNG, file extension
17960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17972 \begin_inset Index idx
17975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18007 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18011 (JPG, file extension
18012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18036 \begin_inset Index idx
18039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18070 \begin_layout Description
18072 \begin_inset space ~
18075 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18077 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18078 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18079 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18080 \begin_inset Newline newline
18083 Scalable image formats can be
18084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18087 Scalable Vector Graphics
18088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18091 (SVG, file extension
18092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18104 \begin_inset Index idx
18107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18139 Encapsulated PostScript
18140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18143 (EPS, file extension
18144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18156 \begin_inset Index idx
18159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18191 Portable Document Format
18192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18195 (PDF, file extension
18196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18208 \begin_inset Index idx
18211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18226 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18227 result will not be scalable.
18228 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18234 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18242 \begin_layout Standard
18243 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18250 \begin_layout Subsection
18251 Grouping of Image Settings
18252 \begin_inset Index idx
18255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18256 Images ! Settings grouping
18264 \begin_layout Standard
18265 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18267 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18268 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18270 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18271 need to manually change each of them.
18275 \begin_layout Standard
18276 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18279 \begin_inset space ~
18283 \begin_inset space ~
18298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18306 \begin_inset space ~
18310 \begin_inset space ~
18317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18327 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18328 and checking the name of the desired group.
18331 \begin_layout Section
18333 \begin_inset Index idx
18336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18352 \begin_layout Standard
18353 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18356 arg "tabular-insert"
18361 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18365 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18366 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18367 from the rest of the table.
18368 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18369 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18371 Here is an example table:
18374 \begin_layout Standard
18376 \begin_inset Tabular
18377 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18378 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18379 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18380 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18381 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18382 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18582 \begin_layout Subsection
18586 \begin_layout Standard
18587 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18590 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18594 This brings up the table dialog.
18595 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18596 cursor is placed currently.
18597 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18598 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18599 done on all of your selection.
18602 \begin_layout Standard
18603 In addition to the table dialog, the
18606 \begin_inset space ~
18611 helps you in setting table properties.
18612 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18615 \begin_layout Standard
18619 \begin_inset space ~
18624 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18625 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18626 current cell respectively.
18627 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18629 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18630 of text, see section
18631 \begin_inset space ~
18635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18637 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18644 \begin_layout Standard
18645 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18646 using the check box
18655 This will merge the cells to
18659 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18660 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18661 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18662 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18663 in the last row without the upper border:
18666 \begin_layout Standard
18668 \begin_inset Tabular
18669 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18670 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18671 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18672 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18673 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18674 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18685 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18694 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18770 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18805 \begin_layout Standard
18806 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18807 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
18808 explained in the chapter
18815 \begin_inset space ~
18821 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18825 degrees counterclockwise.
18826 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18829 \begin_layout Standard
18830 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18838 Most DVI-viewers are
18842 able to display rotations.
18850 \begin_layout Standard
18855 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18860 adds lines for all cell borders.
18863 \begin_layout Subsection
18865 \begin_inset Index idx
18868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18869 Tables ! Longtables
18875 \begin_inset Index idx
18878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18887 \begin_layout Standard
18888 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18891 \begin_inset space ~
18895 \begin_inset space ~
18904 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18905 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18908 \begin_layout Description
18913 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18914 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
18915 except for the first page, if
18918 \begin_inset space ~
18926 \begin_layout Description
18930 \begin_inset space ~
18935 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18936 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18939 \begin_layout Description
18944 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18945 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
18946 except for the last page, if
18949 \begin_inset space ~
18957 \begin_layout Description
18961 \begin_inset space ~
18966 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18967 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18970 \begin_layout Description
18971 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18972 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18974 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18978 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18981 \begin_inset space ~
18989 \begin_layout Standard
18990 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18991 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18992 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
18998 In this context, first means first in this order:
19001 \begin_inset space ~
19013 \begin_inset space ~
19018 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19021 \begin_layout Standard
19023 \begin_inset Tabular
19024 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19025 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19026 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19027 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19028 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19029 <row endfirsthead="true">
19030 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19036 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19041 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19050 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19060 <row endfirsthead="true">
19061 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19072 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19081 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19093 <row endhead="true">
19094 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19105 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19114 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19124 <row endhead="true">
19125 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19145 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19157 <row endfoot="true">
19158 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19169 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19178 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19209 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20150 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20159 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20179 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20210 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20272 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20303 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20365 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20396 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20427 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20458 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20489 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20520 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20551 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20644 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20675 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20706 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20737 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20768 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20799 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20830 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20861 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20892 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20954 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20985 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21016 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21047 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21078 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21109 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21139 <row endlastfoot="true">
21140 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21160 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 \begin_layout Subsection
21179 \begin_inset Index idx
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21191 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21198 \begin_layout Standard
21199 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21200 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21201 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21202 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21206 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21209 \begin_layout Standard
21210 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21211 for the column in the table dialog.
21212 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21213 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21217 \begin_layout Standard
21219 \begin_inset Tabular
21220 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21221 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21222 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21223 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21224 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21369 This is longer now.
21374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21426 This is longer now.
21431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21457 \begin_layout Standard
21458 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21459 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21464 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21465 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21471 Selection with the mouse or with
21475 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21476 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21477 the selection from outside the table.
21480 \begin_layout Section
21482 \begin_inset Index idx
21485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21501 \begin_layout Subsection
21505 \begin_layout Standard
21506 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21507 have a fixed location.
21509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21516 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21524 \begin_inset space ~
21529 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21530 too many notes on the current page.
21533 \begin_layout Standard
21534 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21535 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21536 and pages without text.
21537 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21538 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21539 Floats are therefore numbered.
21540 Referencing is described in section
21541 \begin_inset space ~
21545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21547 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21554 \begin_layout Standard
21555 To insert a float, use the menu
21557 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21561 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21562 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21564 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21565 \begin_inset Index idx
21568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21574 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21575 paragraph within the float.
21576 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21577 by left-clicking on the box label.
21578 A closed float box looks like this:
21579 \begin_inset Graphics
21580 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21585 – a gray button with a red label.
21588 \begin_layout Standard
21589 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21590 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21593 \begin_layout Subsection
21597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21601 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21606 \begin_inset Index idx
21609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21610 Floats ! Figure floats
21618 \begin_layout Standard
21620 \begin_inset space ~
21624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21626 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21630 was created using the menu
21632 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21633 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21639 arg "float-insert figure"
21643 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21646 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21652 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21656 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21657 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21659 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21661 \begin_inset space ~
21669 arg "layout-paragraph"
21675 \begin_layout Standard
21676 \begin_inset Float figure
21681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21683 \begin_inset Graphics
21684 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21694 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21699 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21703 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21716 \begin_layout Standard
21717 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21718 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21720 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21729 ) and refer to it using the menu
21731 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21737 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21741 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21742 vague references like
21743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21750 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21760 For more about cross-references, see section
21761 \begin_inset space ~
21765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21767 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21774 \begin_layout Standard
21775 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21776 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21777 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21778 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21779 as described in section
21780 \begin_inset space ~
21784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21786 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21792 \begin_inset space ~
21796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21798 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21802 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21803 You can also set the images one below the other.
21805 \begin_inset space ~
21809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21811 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21818 reference "fig:Platypus"
21822 are the subfigures.
21825 \begin_layout Standard
21826 \begin_inset Float figure
21831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21832 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21836 \begin_inset Float figure
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21847 name "fig:Undefinable"
21859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21860 \begin_inset Graphics
21861 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21872 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21876 \begin_inset Float figure
21881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21882 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21887 name "fig:Platypus"
21899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21900 \begin_inset Graphics
21901 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21913 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21920 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21925 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21929 Two distorted images.
21942 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21944 \begin_inset Index idx
21947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21948 Floats ! Table floats
21956 \begin_layout Standard
21957 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21959 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21960 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21963 or the toolbar button
21966 arg "float-insert table"
21970 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
21971 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
21972 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
21974 \begin_inset space ~
21978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21980 reference "tab:Table-float"
21987 \begin_layout Standard
21988 \begin_inset Float table
21993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21994 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21999 name "tab:Table-float"
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22013 \begin_inset Tabular
22014 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22015 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22016 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22017 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22018 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22145 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22166 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22169 \end{array}\right]$
22177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22211 \begin_layout Subsection
22213 \begin_inset Index idx
22216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 \begin_layout Standard
22226 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22227 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22228 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22230 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22238 \begin_inset space ~
22246 \begin_layout Section
22248 \begin_inset Index idx
22251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 \begin_layout Standard
22261 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22263 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22264 \begin_inset space \space{}
22271 \begin_layout Standard
22272 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22274 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22278 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22279 and its alignment within the page.
22282 \begin_layout Standard
22284 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22294 height_special "totalheight"
22297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22300 This is a minipage.
22301 The text is set in an italic style.
22304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22308 another formatting.
22316 \begin_layout Standard
22317 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22320 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22324 as described in section
22325 \begin_inset space ~
22329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22331 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22336 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22342 \begin_layout Standard
22343 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22353 height_special "totalheight"
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22357 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22358 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22364 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22368 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22378 height_special "totalheight"
22381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22382 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22383 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22391 \begin_layout Standard
22392 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22398 \begin_layout Standard
22399 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22401 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22408 \begin_inset space ~
22416 \begin_layout Chapter
22417 Mathematical Formulas
22418 \begin_inset Index idx
22421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 \begin_inset Index idx
22431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22462 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22469 \begin_layout Standard
22470 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22475 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22478 \begin_layout Section
22480 \begin_inset Index idx
22483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22492 \begin_layout Standard
22493 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22506 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22508 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22509 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22510 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22512 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22518 \begin_layout Standard
22519 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22523 \begin_inset space ~
22528 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22531 \begin_layout Standard
22532 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22533 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22536 \begin_layout Standard
22537 This is a line with an inline formula
22538 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22544 \begin_layout Standard
22545 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22546 paragraph, like this one:
22547 \begin_inset Formula
22554 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22557 \begin_layout Standard
22558 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22559 For example, typing
22560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22573 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22574 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22578 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22581 \begin_inset space ~
22589 \begin_layout Subsection
22590 Navigating in Formulas
22591 \begin_inset Index idx
22594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22603 \begin_layout Standard
22604 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22605 achieved with the arrow keys.
22606 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22607 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22612 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22613 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22617 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22621 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22624 \end{array}\right]$
22632 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22637 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22638 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22641 \begin_layout Standard
22646 , printed in this document as
22647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22651 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22658 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22659 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22660 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22665 For example, if you want
22666 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22674 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22684 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22688 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22693 , since in the latter case only the
22696 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22701 will be under the square root sign:
22702 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22708 \begin_layout Standard
22709 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22711 \begin_inset Formula
22713 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22722 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22723 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22726 \begin_layout Subsection
22730 \begin_layout Standard
22731 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22732 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22736 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22737 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22738 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22739 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22740 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22743 \begin_layout Subsection
22744 Exponents and Subscripts
22745 \begin_inset Index idx
22748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22755 \begin_inset Index idx
22758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 \begin_layout Standard
22768 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22771 arg "math-superscript"
22777 arg "math-subscript"
22780 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22782 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22785 , type in a formula
22788 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22798 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22804 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22808 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22814 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22820 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22829 , you have to use an extra
22833 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22834 For example, if you want
22835 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22841 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22847 Subscripts are similar: To get
22848 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22854 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22862 \begin_layout Subsection
22864 \begin_inset Index idx
22867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22876 \begin_layout Standard
22877 Create a fraction either with the command
22883 or by using the icon
22886 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22892 \begin_inset space ~
22898 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22899 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22900 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22905 To move back up, press
22910 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22911 \begin_inset Formula
22913 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22916 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22924 \begin_layout Subsection
22926 \begin_inset Index idx
22929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22938 \begin_layout Standard
22939 Roots can be created using the
22942 \begin_inset space ~
22950 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22956 arg "math-insert \\root"
22978 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22984 always produces a square root.
22987 \begin_layout Subsection
22988 Operators with Limits
22989 \begin_inset Index idx
22992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22999 \begin_inset Index idx
23002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23011 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23018 \begin_layout Standard
23020 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23024 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23027 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23028 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23029 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23030 The sum operator will automatically place its
23031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23038 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23040 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23044 \begin_inset Formula
23046 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23051 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23055 \begin_layout Standard
23056 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23058 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23059 behind the operator and using the menu
23061 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23062 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23064 \begin_inset space ~
23068 \begin_inset space ~
23082 \begin_layout Standard
23083 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23092 \begin_inset Index idx
23095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23102 \begin_inset Formula
23104 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23109 which will place the
23110 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23122 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23123 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23129 \begin_layout Standard
23130 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23137 Have a look at section
23138 \begin_inset space ~
23142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23144 reference "sub:Functions"
23148 for an explanation of function macros.
23151 \begin_layout Subsection
23153 \begin_inset Index idx
23156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23165 \begin_layout Standard
23166 Most math symbols can be found in the
23169 \begin_inset space ~
23174 under one of several categories; including
23191 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23195 \begin_layout Standard
23196 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23197 you don't have to use the
23200 \begin_inset space ~
23205 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23206 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23209 \begin_layout Subsection
23211 \begin_inset Index idx
23214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23223 \begin_layout Standard
23224 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23229 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23235 \begin_inset space ~
23243 arg "math-insert \\space"
23247 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23248 For example, the sequence
23253 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23257 \begin_inset Graphics
23258 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23263 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23264 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23265 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23266 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23268 Here are two examples:
23271 \begin_layout Standard
23281 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23287 \begin_layout Standard
23297 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23303 \begin_layout Subsection
23305 \begin_inset Index idx
23308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23317 name "sub:Functions"
23324 \begin_layout Standard
23328 \begin_inset space ~
23333 contains under the button
23336 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23339 a number of function macros, such as
23340 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23344 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23352 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23359 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23360 avoid confusions, because
23361 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23365 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23371 \begin_layout Standard
23372 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23374 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23378 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23384 \begin_layout Standard
23385 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23386 are placed, as described in section
23387 \begin_inset space ~
23391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23393 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23400 \begin_layout Subsection
23402 \begin_inset Index idx
23405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23414 \begin_layout Standard
23415 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23417 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23418 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23419 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23422 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23423 Our example is entered by typing
23428 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23435 \begin_inset space ~
23439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23441 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23445 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23448 \begin_layout Standard
23449 \begin_inset Float table
23454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23455 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23460 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23464 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23474 \begin_inset Tabular
23475 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23476 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23477 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23478 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23479 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23563 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23617 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23725 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23833 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23887 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23941 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23995 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24040 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24061 \begin_layout Standard
24062 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24065 \begin_inset space ~
24073 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24076 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24080 \begin_layout Section
24081 Brackets and Delimiters
24082 \begin_inset Index idx
24085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24092 \begin_inset Index idx
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24104 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24111 \begin_layout Standard
24112 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24113 For some purposes, using just the keys
24118 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24119 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24120 toolbar delimiter icon
24123 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24127 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24128 \begin_inset Formula
24130 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24138 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24139 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24143 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24146 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24152 \begin_inset Formula
24154 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24162 \begin_layout Standard
24163 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24164 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24168 \begin_layout Standard
24169 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24170 left side and right side.
24171 If you use the option
24174 \begin_inset space ~
24179 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24180 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24181 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24186 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24189 \begin_layout Standard
24190 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24191 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24192 is to go inside the brackets.
24193 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24198 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24199 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24200 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24204 arg "math-delim ( )"
24210 \begin_layout Section
24211 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24212 \begin_inset Index idx
24215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24222 \begin_inset Index idx
24225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24232 \begin_inset Index idx
24235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24236 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24244 \begin_layout Standard
24245 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24248 \begin_inset space ~
24256 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24260 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24261 Here is an example:
24262 \begin_inset Formula
24264 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24273 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24274 \begin_inset space ~
24278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24280 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24285 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24286 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24287 This alignment is set in the box
24292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24340 for every column as default.
24341 For example, the sequence
24342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24353 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24354 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24355 corresponds to the relevant column.
24356 The result will look like this:
24357 \begin_inset Formula
24360 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24361 column & has & has\, right\\
24362 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24371 \begin_layout Standard
24372 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24375 arg "newline-insert newline"
24378 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24379 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24381 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24384 or the math toolbar.
24387 \begin_layout Standard
24388 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24389 It can be created with the menu
24391 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24392 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24394 \begin_inset space ~
24406 Here is an example:
24407 \begin_inset Formula
24421 \begin_layout Standard
24422 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24425 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24428 arg "newline-insert newline"
24432 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24437 arg "newline-insert newline"
24440 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24448 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24449 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24450 A new row is created by every further entry of
24453 arg "newline-insert newline"
24457 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24458 Here is an example:
24459 \begin_inset Formula
24461 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24462 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24467 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24468 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24469 \begin_inset Formula
24471 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24479 \begin_layout Standard
24480 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24487 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24488 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24491 reference "eq:asquared"
24496 The other types are described in section
24497 \begin_inset space ~
24501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24503 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24510 \begin_layout Section
24511 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24512 \begin_inset Index idx
24515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24516 Math ! Formula numbering
24522 \begin_inset Index idx
24525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24526 Math ! Referencing formulas
24532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24534 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24541 \begin_layout Standard
24542 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24544 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24545 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24547 \begin_inset space ~
24551 \begin_inset space ~
24559 arg "math-number-toggle"
24563 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24564 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24565 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24566 the document class.
24567 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24568 separated by a dot:
24569 \begin_inset Formula
24579 arg "math-number-toggle"
24582 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24583 You can only number displayed formulas.
24586 \begin_layout Standard
24587 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24589 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24590 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24592 \begin_inset space ~
24596 \begin_inset space ~
24604 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24607 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24608 \begin_inset Formula
24611 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24617 To number all lines use the shortcut
24620 arg "math-number-toggle"
24626 \begin_layout Standard
24627 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24630 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24631 A label is inserted with the menu
24633 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24642 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24643 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24644 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24656 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24657 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24658 We inserted in the following example the label
24659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24666 in the second line:
24667 \begin_inset Formula
24669 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24670 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24675 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24676 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24677 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24679 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24681 \begin_inset space ~
24689 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24693 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24694 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24695 as the formula number:
24698 \begin_layout Standard
24699 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24702 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24709 \begin_layout Standard
24710 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24711 \begin_inset space ~
24715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24717 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24722 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24730 \begin_layout Section
24731 User defined math macros
24732 \begin_inset Index idx
24735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24744 \begin_layout Standard
24745 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24746 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24747 Math macros are explained in section
24750 \begin_inset space ~
24762 \begin_layout Section
24766 \begin_layout Subsection
24768 \begin_inset Index idx
24771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24780 \begin_layout Standard
24781 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24782 To set a font in a formula, use the
24785 \begin_inset space ~
24793 arg "math-insert \\font"
24796 , or enter its command, listed in table
24797 \begin_inset space ~
24801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24803 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24810 \begin_layout Standard
24811 \begin_inset Float table
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24817 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24822 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24826 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24836 \begin_inset Tabular
24837 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24838 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24839 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24840 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24872 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24899 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24926 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24959 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24986 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25013 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25047 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25074 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25108 \begin_layout Standard
25109 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25117 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25133 \begin_layout Standard
25134 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25135 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25140 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25141 space when you need a space in the box.
25142 Here is an example where
25143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25154 denotes the set of numbers:
25155 \begin_inset Formula
25157 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25165 \begin_layout Standard
25166 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25167 You can, for example, put a character in
25176 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25180 \begin_inset Newline newline
25183 So it is better not to use this feature.
25186 \begin_layout Standard
25187 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25188 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25192 \begin_inset Newline newline
25195 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25201 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25202 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25208 \begin_layout Standard
25215 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25218 \begin_layout Standard
25219 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25221 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25222 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25224 \begin_inset space ~
25232 \begin_layout Subsection
25234 \begin_inset Index idx
25237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25246 \begin_layout Standard
25247 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25249 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25253 \begin_inset space ~
25257 \begin_inset space ~
25265 \begin_inset space ~
25273 arg "math-insert \\font"
25277 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25278 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25279 Here is an example:
25280 \begin_inset Formula
25283 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25284 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25293 \begin_layout Subsection
25295 \begin_inset Index idx
25298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25307 \begin_layout Standard
25308 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25309 automatically chosen in most situations.
25327 For most characters,
25335 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25336 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25341 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25342 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25344 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25347 arg "math-insert \\style"
25351 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25352 For example, you can set
25353 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25356 , which is normally in
25365 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25369 The four styles are used in the following example:
25372 \begin_layout Standard
25373 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25377 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25381 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25385 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25391 \begin_layout Standard
25392 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25393 is set in a particular size with the menu
25395 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25397 \begin_inset space ~
25402 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25403 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25404 will be adjusted to correspond.
25405 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25416 \begin_layout Standard
25420 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25426 \begin_layout Section
25428 \begin_inset Index idx
25431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25438 \begin_inset Index idx
25441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25450 \begin_layout Standard
25451 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25452 (AMS) that are in common use.
25455 \begin_layout Subsection
25456 Enabling AMS-Support
25459 \begin_layout Standard
25460 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25461 the document by selecting the checkbox
25464 \begin_inset space ~
25468 \begin_inset space ~
25472 \begin_inset space ~
25479 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25483 \begin_inset Index idx
25486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25487 Document ! Settings
25495 \begin_inset space ~
25501 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25502 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25505 \begin_layout Subsection
25507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25509 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25514 \begin_inset Index idx
25517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25518 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25526 \begin_layout Standard
25527 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25528 LyX allows you to choose between
25549 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25550 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25556 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25559 \begin_layout Chapter
25563 \begin_layout Section
25565 \begin_inset Index idx
25568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25577 name "sec:Cross-References"
25584 \begin_layout Standard
25585 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25586 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25588 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25589 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25590 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25593 \begin_layout Enumerate
25597 \begin_layout Enumerate
25598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25600 name "enu:Second-item"
25607 \begin_layout Enumerate
25611 \begin_layout Standard
25612 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25614 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25617 or by pressing the toolbar button
25624 A gray label box like this:
25625 \begin_inset Graphics
25626 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25631 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25632 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25667 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25668 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25684 \begin_layout Standard
25685 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25687 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25690 or the toolbar button
25693 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25697 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25698 \begin_inset Graphics
25699 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25704 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25706 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25719 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25723 \begin_layout Standard
25724 As an alternative to
25726 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25729 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25734 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25735 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25737 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25749 \begin_layout Standard
25750 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25751 \begin_inset space ~
25755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25757 reference "enu:Second-item"
25764 \begin_layout Standard
25765 It is recommended to use a protected space
25769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25770 described in section
25771 \begin_inset space ~
25775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25777 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25786 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25787 line breaks between them.
25790 \begin_layout Standard
25791 There are six formats of cross-references:
25794 \begin_layout Description
25795 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25798 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25805 \begin_layout Description
25806 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25807 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25819 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25826 \begin_layout Description
25827 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25828 \begin_inset space ~
25832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25833 LatexCommand pageref
25834 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25841 \begin_layout Description
25843 \begin_inset space ~
25847 \begin_inset space ~
25850 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25852 LatexCommand vpageref
25853 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25858 \begin_inset Newline newline
25861 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25862 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25863 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25864 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25865 it prints “on the next page”.
25866 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25869 \begin_layout Description
25871 \begin_inset space ~
25875 \begin_inset space ~
25879 \begin_inset space ~
25882 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25885 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25890 \begin_inset Newline newline
25893 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25899 ; otherwise it behaves like
25903 \begin_inset space ~
25907 \begin_inset space ~
25916 \begin_layout Description
25918 \begin_inset space ~
25921 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25922 \begin_inset Newline newline
25926 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25934 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25943 \begin_inset Index idx
25946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25947 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25953 \begin_inset Index idx
25956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25957 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25968 \begin_inset Newline newline
25971 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25974 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25978 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25979 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25987 is the default and preferred because
25991 supports only English documents.
25992 The format is specified by using the command
26004 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26005 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26018 ) can be done with this command
26019 \begin_inset Newline newline
26026 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26031 \begin_inset Newline newline
26034 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26036 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26038 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26045 \begin_layout Description
26047 \begin_inset space ~
26050 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26052 LatexCommand nameref
26053 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26060 \begin_layout Standard
26061 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26062 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26063 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26067 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26071 \begin_layout Standard
26072 You can only use the style
26076 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26080 is always possible.
26083 \begin_layout Standard
26084 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26085 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26087 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26088 \begin_inset space ~
26092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26094 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26101 \begin_layout Standard
26102 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26106 \begin_inset space ~
26110 \begin_inset space ~
26115 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26116 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26119 \begin_inset space ~
26124 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26125 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26128 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26134 \begin_layout Standard
26135 You can change labels at any time.
26136 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26137 do not need to think about this.
26140 \begin_layout Standard
26141 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26142 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26143 instead of the reference.
26146 \begin_layout Standard
26147 References are described in detail in the section
26148 \begin_inset space ~
26152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26162 \begin_inset space ~
26170 \begin_layout Section
26171 Table of Contents and other Listings
26172 \begin_inset Index idx
26175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26182 \begin_inset Index idx
26185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26201 \begin_layout Subsection
26203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26205 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26212 \begin_layout Standard
26213 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26215 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26216 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26218 \begin_inset space ~
26222 \begin_inset space ~
26228 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26229 If you click on it, the
26233 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26234 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26235 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26237 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26239 \begin_inset space ~
26244 that is described in section
26245 \begin_inset space ~
26249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26251 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26258 \begin_layout Standard
26259 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26260 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26262 \begin_inset space ~
26266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26268 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26272 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26274 \begin_inset space ~
26278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26280 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26284 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26286 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26289 \begin_layout Subsection
26290 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26293 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26300 \begin_layout Standard
26301 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26303 You can insert them via the
26305 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26309 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26312 \begin_layout Section
26313 URLs and Hyperlinks
26314 \begin_inset Index idx
26317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26324 \begin_inset Index idx
26327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26336 \begin_layout Subsection
26338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26347 \begin_layout Standard
26348 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26350 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26356 \begin_layout Standard
26357 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26358 \begin_inset Flex URL
26361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26371 \begin_layout Standard
26372 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26378 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26382 \begin_layout Standard
26383 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26391 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26399 \begin_layout Subsection
26401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26403 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26410 \begin_layout Standard
26411 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26413 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26416 or with the toolbar button
26423 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26432 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26433 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26434 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26436 name "LyX's homepage"
26437 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26441 , an Email address like this:
26442 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26444 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26445 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26450 , or a link to a file.
26453 \begin_layout Standard
26454 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26467 to the link target.
26470 \begin_layout Standard
26471 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26472 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26473 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26474 the text style dialog.
26475 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26479 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26481 name "LyX's homepage"
26482 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26489 \begin_layout Standard
26490 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26494 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26496 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26497 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26501 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26503 \begin_inset Newline newline
26511 \begin_inset Newline newline
26518 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26521 \begin_layout Section
26523 \begin_inset Index idx
26526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26535 name "sec:Appendices"
26542 \begin_layout Standard
26543 Appendices are created with the menu
26545 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26547 \begin_inset space ~
26551 \begin_inset space ~
26557 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26558 as the appendix part of the book.
26559 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26562 \begin_layout Standard
26563 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26564 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26565 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26566 and the subsection number.
26567 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26571 \begin_layout Standard
26573 \begin_inset space ~
26577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26579 reference "chap:Credits"
26584 \begin_inset space ~
26588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26590 reference "sub:Export"
26597 \begin_layout Section
26599 \begin_inset Index idx
26602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26611 name "sec:Bibliography"
26618 \begin_layout Standard
26619 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26620 You can include a bibliography database,
26624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26625 Known under the name
26626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26638 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26639 manually, using the paragraph environment
26643 , which was described in section
26644 \begin_inset space ~
26648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26650 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26655 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26656 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26660 use a bibliography database.
26663 \begin_layout Subsection
26664 The Bibliography Environment
26667 \begin_layout Standard
26672 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26674 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26683 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26685 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26694 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26697 \begin_layout Standard
26698 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26700 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26703 or the toolbar button
26706 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26710 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26711 containing the available citations.
26712 Select one or more keys from the list and
26722 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26723 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26727 \begin_layout Standard
26728 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26729 entry with surrounding brackets.
26734 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26735 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26747 \begin_layout Standard
26750 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26753 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26755 key "latexcompanion"
26762 \begin_layout Standard
26763 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26764 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26773 \begin_layout Standard
26774 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26777 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26779 \begin_inset space ~
26787 arg "layout-paragraph"
26791 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26794 \begin_layout Subsection
26795 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26796 \begin_inset Index idx
26799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26800 Bibliography ! Databases
26806 \begin_inset Index idx
26809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26810 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26818 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26825 \begin_layout Standard
26826 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26832 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26834 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26835 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26840 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26842 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26843 your working field in a database.
26844 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26845 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26846 list for that document.
26847 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26851 \begin_layout Standard
26852 The database is a text file with the file extension
26853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26864 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26865 The format is explained in
26866 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26872 and in the LaTeX books (
26873 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26875 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26880 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26881 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26882 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26883 \begin_inset Flex URL
26886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26888 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26896 \begin_layout Standard
26897 To use a database, use the menu
26899 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26904 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26917 \begin_inset space ~
26923 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26924 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26931 Add bibliography to TOC
26933 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26938 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26939 in the document or just the cited references.
26942 \begin_layout Standard
26943 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26955 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26956 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26957 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26959 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26965 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26966 \begin_inset Newline newline
26970 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26972 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26984 \begin_layout Standard
26985 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26988 \begin_layout Standard
26989 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26990 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
26996 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26997 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27002 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27003 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27004 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27019 The following variants are possible:
27022 \begin_layout Description
27023 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27024 with other bibliography packages (e.
27025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27029 \begin_inset space \space{}
27036 ), only with the package
27040 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27044 \begin_layout Description
27045 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27046 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27047 with all bibliography packages, except
27052 \begin_layout Description
27053 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27058 , works with all bibliography packages
27061 \begin_layout Standard
27062 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27064 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27070 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27079 \begin_layout Standard
27080 When you select the option
27082 Sectioned bibliography
27086 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27087 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27090 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27091 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27093 Customizing Bibliographies
27101 Additional Features
27106 \begin_layout Standard
27107 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27108 the two methods of creating them.
27109 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27110 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27111 We used the style file
27115 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27118 \begin_layout Subsection
27119 Bibliography layout
27120 \begin_inset Index idx
27123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27124 Bibliography ! Layout
27132 \begin_layout Standard
27133 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27134 For this feature you need to enable the option
27140 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27144 \begin_inset Index idx
27147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27148 Document ! Settings
27158 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27159 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27160 in the previous section.
27163 \begin_layout Standard
27164 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27165 the citation reference window.
27166 Here is an example where the text
27167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27171 \begin_inset space ~
27175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27178 appears after the reference:
27181 \begin_layout Standard
27183 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27186 key "latexcompanion"
27193 \begin_layout Section
27195 \begin_inset Index idx
27198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27214 \begin_layout Standard
27215 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27217 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27219 \begin_inset space ~
27224 or the toolbar button
27231 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27232 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27233 by LyX as the index entry.
27236 \begin_layout Standard
27237 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27239 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27240 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27242 \begin_inset space ~
27248 A light blue box labeled
27249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27260 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27261 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27264 \begin_layout Standard
27265 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27266 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27268 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27270 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27277 \begin_layout Subsection
27278 Grouping Index Entries
27279 \begin_inset Index idx
27282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27291 \begin_layout Standard
27292 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27294 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27295 lists under the entry
27296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27304 First we create the entry
27305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27313 \begin_inset space ~
27317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27319 reference "sub:Lists"
27324 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27325 \begin_inset space ~
27329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27331 reference "sec:Itemize"
27335 , we insert the command
27338 \begin_layout Standard
27344 \begin_layout Standard
27348 \begin_layout Standard
27354 \begin_layout Standard
27355 for the enumerated list in section
27356 \begin_inset space ~
27360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27362 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27369 \begin_layout Standard
27370 The exclamation mark
27371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27378 marks the grouping levels.
27379 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27380 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27381 If we don't have an index entry for
27382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27389 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27392 \begin_layout Subsection
27394 \begin_inset Index idx
27397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27398 Index ! Page ranges
27406 \begin_layout Standard
27407 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27409 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27410 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27411 an index entry in section
27412 \begin_inset space ~
27416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27418 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27425 \begin_layout Standard
27428 Paragraph environments|(
27431 \begin_layout Standard
27432 and another entry at the end of section
27433 \begin_inset space ~
27437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27439 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27446 \begin_layout Standard
27449 Paragraph environments|)
27452 \begin_layout Standard
27454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27477 respectively start and end the index range.
27478 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27479 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27480 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27481 An example is the index entry
27482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27485 Document ! Settings
27486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27492 \begin_layout Subsection
27494 \begin_inset Index idx
27497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27498 Index ! Cross referencing
27506 \begin_layout Standard
27507 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27508 We referred for example in the index entry
27509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27517 \begin_inset space ~
27521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27523 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27527 ) to the index entry
27528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27535 in the same section using the entry
27538 \begin_layout Standard
27541 GIF|see{Image formats}
27544 \begin_layout Standard
27545 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27546 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27547 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27550 \begin_layout Subsection
27552 \begin_inset Index idx
27555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27556 Index ! Entry order
27564 \begin_layout Standard
27565 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27566 follow the rules for the index order.
27567 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27572 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27574 \begin_inset space ~
27578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27580 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27589 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27590 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27615 \begin_inset Index idx
27618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27619 Dummy entries ! maïs
27625 \begin_inset Index idx
27628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27629 Dummy entries ! maître
27635 \begin_inset Index idx
27638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27639 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27644 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27645 maïs, maison, maître.
27646 To achieve this, we use the command
27649 \begin_layout Standard
27652 previous entry@current entry
27655 \begin_layout Standard
27656 In our case we want to have
27657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27672 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27675 \begin_layout Standard
27681 \begin_layout Standard
27682 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27683 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27684 See the next subsection for an example.
27687 \begin_layout Standard
27688 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27694 \begin_layout Standard
27695 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27700 to generate the index (see sec.
27701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27707 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27716 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27724 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27728 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27729 index commands start with
27730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27742 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27747 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27750 \begin_layout Standard
27762 \begin_layout Standard
27774 \begin_layout Subsection
27776 \begin_inset Index idx
27779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27780 Index ! Entry layout
27788 \begin_layout Standard
27789 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27790 \begin_inset Index idx
27793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27796 This is an italic dummy entry
27801 You can also format the page number using the character
27802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27809 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27810 We can write for example
27813 \begin_layout Standard
27816 italic page number:|textit
27819 \begin_layout Standard
27820 to get the page number in italic.
27821 \begin_inset Index idx
27824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27825 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27830 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27848 \begin_inset space ~
27854 Have a look at section
27855 \begin_inset space ~
27859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27861 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27865 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27868 \begin_layout Standard
27869 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27877 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27881 to generate the index, see sec.
27882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27888 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27897 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27902 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27903 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27906 key "latexcompanion"
27918 \begin_layout Standard
27919 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27921 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27922 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27923 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27924 If so, put the following in the preamble
27927 \begin_layout Standard
27939 \begin_layout Standard
27943 \begin_layout Standard
27949 \begin_layout Standard
27950 in the index entry.
27951 \begin_inset Index idx
27954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27955 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27960 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27961 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27962 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27965 \begin_layout Standard
27966 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27967 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27968 a bold font for all index entries.
27969 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27981 documentation for details,
27982 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27984 key "makeindex,xindy"
27991 \begin_layout Subsection
27993 \begin_inset Index idx
27996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28005 name "sub:Index-Program"
28012 \begin_layout Standard
28013 If the index generation program
28017 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28021 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28030 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28031 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28032 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28033 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28034 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28044 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28045 dialog, see section
28046 \begin_inset space ~
28050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28052 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28057 The available options are listed and explained in
28058 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28060 key "makeindex,xindy"
28065 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28069 \begin_layout Standard
28070 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28071 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28074 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28075 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28079 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28080 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28083 \begin_layout Subsection
28087 \begin_layout Standard
28088 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28089 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28097 next to the standard index.
28098 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28099 that add this feature.
28105 \begin_inset Index idx
28108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28109 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28114 package to generate multiple indexes.
28115 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28120 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28121 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28128 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28129 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28130 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28138 \begin_layout Standard
28139 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28141 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28142 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28145 and select the option
28147 Use multiple Indexes
28154 already contains the standard index
28155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28163 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28164 also appear as a heading) to the
28168 input field and press the
28173 The new index now also appears in the list.
28174 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28178 \begin_layout Standard
28179 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28182 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28189 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28190 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28191 are additional features:
28194 \begin_layout Itemize
28195 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28196 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28199 \begin_layout Itemize
28200 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28201 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28209 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28210 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28211 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28212 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28215 \begin_layout Section
28216 Nomenclature/Glossary
28217 \begin_inset Index idx
28220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28227 \begin_inset Index idx
28230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28261 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28268 \begin_layout Standard
28269 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28270 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28271 called nomenclature or glossary.
28274 \begin_layout Standard
28275 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28281 \begin_inset Index idx
28284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28285 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28291 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28292 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28298 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28301 \begin_layout Standard
28302 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28303 and then use the menu
28305 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28311 \begin_inset space ~
28316 or the toolbar button
28319 arg "nomencl-insert"
28324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28335 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28338 \begin_layout Standard
28339 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28340 The first is the term or
28344 that you wish to define.
28349 of the term or symbol.
28352 \begin_layout Standard
28353 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28361 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28369 \begin_layout Subsection
28370 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28371 \begin_inset Index idx
28374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28375 Nomenclature ! Layout
28383 \begin_layout Standard
28384 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28388 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28394 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28402 \begin_inset Newline newline
28410 \begin_inset Newline newline
28416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28423 character starts/ends the formula.
28424 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28436 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28446 \begin_layout Standard
28447 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28448 \begin_inset space ~
28452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28454 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28461 \begin_layout Standard
28465 \begin_inset space ~
28470 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28471 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28476 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28483 in this document is:
28484 \begin_inset Newline newline
28489 dummy entry for the character
28494 \begin_inset Newline newline
28506 \begin_inset space ~
28516 font use the command
28545 \begin_layout Standard
28546 If the characters |
28547 \begin_inset space \space{}
28551 \begin_inset space \space{}
28555 \begin_inset space \space{}
28559 \begin_inset space \space{}
28563 \begin_inset space \space{}
28566 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28567 a quote character in front of them.
28568 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28569 LatexCommand nomenclature
28570 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28571 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28578 \begin_layout Subsection
28579 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28580 \begin_inset Index idx
28583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28584 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28592 \begin_layout Standard
28593 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28594 the symbol definition.
28595 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28597 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28600 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28601 LatexCommand nomenclature
28603 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28610 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28614 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28615 LatexCommand nomenclature
28618 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28623 They will be sorted by
28624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28650 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28653 will be sorted before the
28657 since the character
28658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28665 is considered in sorting.
28668 \begin_layout Standard
28669 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28672 \begin_inset space ~
28677 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28678 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28680 For the example given, you can insert
28684 in this field for the
28685 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28692 will be located before
28693 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28699 \begin_layout Standard
28700 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28705 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28714 \begin_layout Subsection
28715 Nomenclature Options
28716 \begin_inset Index idx
28719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28720 Nomenclature ! Options
28728 \begin_layout Standard
28733 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28734 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28737 \begin_layout Description
28738 refeq Appends the phrase
28739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28754 to every nomenclature entry, where
28760 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28763 \begin_layout Description
28764 refpage Appends the phrase
28765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28780 to every nomenclature entry, where
28786 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28789 \begin_layout Description
28790 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28793 \begin_layout Standard
28794 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28795 class options list in the
28797 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28801 In this document the options
28808 \begin_layout Standard
28809 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28815 \begin_layout Standard
28816 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28817 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28822 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28825 \begin_layout Description
28835 \begin_layout Description
28838 nomrefpage Like the
28845 \begin_layout Description
28848 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28857 \begin_layout Description
28861 \begin_inset space ~
28867 \begin_inset space ~
28872 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28875 \begin_layout Standard
28877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28884 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28885 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28888 \begin_layout Standard
28896 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28899 \begin_inset Newline newline
28906 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28911 \begin_inset Newline newline
28915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28930 by their translation.
28933 \begin_layout Subsection
28934 Printing the Nomenclature
28935 \begin_inset Index idx
28938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28939 Nomenclature ! Printing
28947 \begin_layout Standard
28948 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28950 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28951 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28967 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28968 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28969 You can choose between these settings:
28972 \begin_layout Description
28973 Default a space of 1
28974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28980 \begin_layout Description
28982 \begin_inset space ~
28986 \begin_inset space ~
28989 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28992 \begin_layout Description
28993 Custom custom space
28996 \begin_layout Standard
28997 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29006 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29014 For example, in order to change the name to
29018 , add the following line to the preamble:
29021 \begin_layout Standard
29029 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29032 \begin_layout Subsection
29033 Nomenclature Program
29034 \begin_inset Index idx
29037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29038 Nomenclature ! Program
29044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29046 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29053 \begin_layout Standard
29054 LyX uses the program
29058 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29059 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29064 by adding options, see section
29065 \begin_inset space ~
29069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29071 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29076 The available options are listed and explained in
29077 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29079 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29086 \begin_layout Section
29088 \begin_inset Index idx
29091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29098 \begin_inset Index idx
29101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29102 Document ! Branches
29108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29110 name "sec:Branches"
29117 \begin_layout Standard
29118 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29119 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29120 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29121 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29124 \begin_layout Standard
29125 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29126 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29127 To create a branch, either select the menu
29129 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29130 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29133 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29135 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29142 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29143 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29144 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29145 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29146 (see below for an example).
29147 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29148 to the name of the other) and to add
29149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29161 \begin_inset space ~
29164 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29165 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29168 \begin_layout Standard
29169 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29170 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29172 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29175 where you can choose a branch.
29176 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29180 \begin_layout Standard
29181 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29182 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29185 \begin_layout Standard
29186 \begin_inset Branch Question
29189 \begin_layout Standard
29190 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29198 \begin_layout Standard
29199 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29202 \begin_layout Standard
29203 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29211 \begin_layout Standard
29218 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29219 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29222 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29223 Consider for example a file
29224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29231 which has the above branches.
29233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29240 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29264 branch were inactive,
29265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29280 branch was active, likewise
29281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29296 branch was active, and
29297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29300 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29304 if both branches were active.
29305 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29308 \begin_layout Standard
29309 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29315 \begin_layout Standard
29316 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29317 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29319 For example you can define for the question branch
29323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29324 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29325 \begin_inset space ~
29329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29331 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29343 \begin_layout Standard
29353 \begin_layout Standard
29363 \begin_layout Standard
29364 and for the answer branch
29367 \begin_layout Standard
29377 \begin_layout Standard
29387 \begin_layout Standard
29388 \begin_inset Branch Question
29391 \begin_layout Standard
29395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29423 \begin_layout Standard
29424 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29427 \begin_layout Standard
29431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29459 \begin_layout Standard
29460 Now it is possible to use the
29464 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29471 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29474 commands to obtain conditional output.
29475 Here is an example formula where only the
29482 \begin_inset Formula
29484 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29492 \begin_layout Standard
29493 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29501 \begin_layout Standard
29502 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29508 \begin_inset space \space{}
29511 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29512 For this advanced usage, see the
29517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29520 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29527 \begin_layout Section
29529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29531 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29536 \begin_inset Index idx
29539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29548 \begin_layout Standard
29551 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29552 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29555 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29557 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29562 \begin_inset Index idx
29565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29566 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29571 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29572 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29573 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29574 part of the document.
29578 \begin_layout Standard
29579 The header information in the dialog tab
29583 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29584 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29585 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29586 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29590 \begin_inset space ~
29594 \begin_inset space ~
29599 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29600 title and author entries.
29604 \begin_inset space ~
29608 \begin_inset space ~
29612 \begin_inset space ~
29617 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29620 \begin_layout Standard
29621 You can specify in the dialog tab
29625 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29630 \begin_inset space ~
29634 \begin_inset space ~
29638 \begin_inset space ~
29643 option allows long links to be split;
29646 \begin_inset space ~
29650 \begin_inset space ~
29654 \begin_inset space ~
29662 \begin_inset space ~
29667 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29670 \begin_inset space ~
29675 colors the different links.
29676 The default colors are:
29679 \begin_layout Labeling
29680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29685 for hyperlinks and URLs
29688 \begin_layout Labeling
29689 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29697 \begin_layout Labeling
29698 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29706 \begin_layout Standard
29707 but you can change these in the field
29712 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29715 \begin_layout Standard
29718 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29721 \begin_layout Standard
29726 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29727 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29728 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29731 \begin_layout Standard
29736 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29737 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29738 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29748 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29749 when opening the PDF.
29751 \begin_inset space ~
29754 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29755 \begin_inset space ~
29758 1 will only display the sections.
29761 \begin_layout Standard
29762 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29763 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29769 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29770 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29779 \begin_layout Section
29780 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29783 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29790 \begin_layout Subsection
29792 \begin_inset Index idx
29795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29804 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29811 \begin_layout Standard
29812 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29813 constructs, but not all.
29814 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29815 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29816 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29817 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
29818 and their commands.
29821 \begin_layout Standard
29822 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29824 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29826 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29839 \begin_inset space ~
29844 or by the toolbar button
29857 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29865 \begin_layout Standard
29866 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29867 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29868 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29869 using the LaTeX-command
29875 , you can write the command part
29881 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29885 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29886 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29887 the following example:
29890 \begin_layout Standard
29891 \begin_inset Graphics
29892 filename clipart/ERT.png
29900 \begin_layout Standard
29904 \begin_layout Standard
29905 This is a line with a
29909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29932 \begin_layout Standard
29933 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29941 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29942 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29950 \begin_layout Subsection
29951 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29952 \begin_inset Argument 1
29955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29962 \begin_inset Index idx
29965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29974 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29981 \begin_layout Standard
29982 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29983 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29984 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29993 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29994 any time if you know the right commands.
29995 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
29996 is the end of the day.
29997 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29998 all caption labels bold.
29999 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30001 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30005 \begin_layout Standard
30006 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30007 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30008 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30010 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30019 \begin_layout Standard
30020 As result you find that the package
30025 \begin_inset Index idx
30028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30029 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30035 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30037 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30040 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30055 \begin_inset space ~
30063 \begin_layout Standard
30068 usepackage[options]{package name}
30071 \begin_layout Standard
30072 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30073 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30074 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30077 \begin_layout Standard
30078 In your case the package name is
30083 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30088 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30089 So you add the command
30092 \begin_layout Standard
30097 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30100 \begin_layout Standard
30101 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30106 For more commands provided by the
30110 package, have a look at its documentation,
30111 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30125 \begin_layout Standard
30126 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30128 For example if you use a
30132 class, you don't need the package
30136 , you can instead write
30139 \begin_layout Standard
30144 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30149 \begin_layout Standard
30150 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30151 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30152 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30159 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30162 \begin_layout Standard
30163 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30164 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30166 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30167 the previous section.
30170 \begin_layout Standard
30171 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30173 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30175 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30182 \begin_layout Standard
30183 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30189 \begin_layout Standard
30193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30203 \begin_inset Note Note
30206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30207 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30215 \begin_layout Left Header
30216 \begin_inset Argument 1
30219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30239 \begin_inset Note Note
30242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30243 defines the header line as described below
30251 \begin_layout Center Header
30252 \begin_inset Argument 1
30255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30264 \begin_layout Right Header
30265 \begin_inset Argument 1
30268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30289 \begin_layout Left Footer
30290 \begin_inset Argument 1
30293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30314 \begin_layout Center Footer
30315 \begin_inset Argument 1
30318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30329 \begin_inset Newline newline
30333 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30339 \begin_layout Right Footer
30340 \begin_inset Argument 1
30343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30365 \begin_layout Section
30366 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30369 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30374 \begin_inset Index idx
30377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30378 Document ! Header/Footer line
30384 \begin_inset Index idx
30387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30396 \begin_layout Standard
30397 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30401 \begin_inset space ~
30412 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30418 \begin_inset space ~
30424 As a second step add in the menu
30426 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30427 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30434 Custom Header/Footerlines
30435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30439 This module offers the following 6
30440 \begin_inset space ~
30446 \begin_layout Description
30448 \begin_inset space ~
30452 \begin_inset space ~
30456 \begin_inset space ~
30460 \begin_inset space ~
30464 \begin_inset space ~
30470 \begin_layout Description
30472 \begin_inset space ~
30476 \begin_inset space ~
30480 \begin_inset space ~
30484 \begin_inset space ~
30488 \begin_inset space ~
30494 \begin_layout Standard
30495 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30498 \begin_layout Standard
30499 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30500 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30502 \begin_inset space ~
30506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30508 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30512 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30515 \begin_layout Standard
30516 \begin_inset Float figure
30522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30525 \begin_inset Tabular
30526 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30527 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30528 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30529 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30530 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30532 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30550 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30561 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30579 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30590 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30594 The normal text on the page goes here.
30595 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30597 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30598 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30603 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30612 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30623 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30641 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30652 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30670 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30688 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30693 name "fig:Page-layout"
30697 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30710 \begin_layout Standard
30711 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30719 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30723 \begin_inset space ~
30728 is set to “Default”.
30729 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30738 \begin_layout Subsection
30742 \begin_layout Standard
30743 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30744 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30745 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30746 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30748 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30749 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30752 \begin_layout Standard
30753 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30756 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30769 \begin_inset space ~
30777 \begin_layout Description
30780 thepage prints the current page number
30783 \begin_layout Description
30786 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30789 \begin_layout Description
30792 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30795 \begin_layout Description
30798 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30799 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30806 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30809 because it usually goes in a left header.
30812 \begin_layout Description
30815 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30816 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30818 It is normally used in the right header.
30821 \begin_layout Subsection
30822 Default header/footer
30825 \begin_layout Standard
30826 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30827 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30828 footer has the page number.
30829 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30830 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30831 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30834 \begin_inset space ~
30842 \begin_layout Subsection
30846 \begin_layout Standard
30847 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30848 Some pages are different.
30849 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30850 a new part or chapter in your book.
30851 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30852 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30853 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30857 Header and footer decoration line
30860 \begin_layout Standard
30861 By default, you get a 0.4
30862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30865 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30866 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30878 in the following way:
30881 \begin_layout Standard
30888 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30891 \begin_layout Standard
30892 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30901 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30908 \begin_layout Standard
30909 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30910 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30911 \begin_inset space ~
30915 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30925 Several header/footer lines
30928 \begin_layout Standard
30929 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30930 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30931 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30933 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30947 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30948 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30961 \begin_inset space ~
30969 \begin_layout Standard
30976 headheight}{height}
30979 \begin_layout Standard
30980 where height is a size in standard units.
30981 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30982 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
30983 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
30985 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31002 \begin_inset space ~
31007 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31012 \begin_inset Index idx
31015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31016 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31022 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31023 for your header/footer.
31026 \begin_layout Subsection
31030 \begin_layout Standard
31031 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31032 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31033 This example consists of the following definition:
31036 \begin_layout Description
31038 \begin_inset space ~
31047 , empty optional argument
31050 \begin_layout Description
31052 \begin_inset space ~
31055 Header empty, empty optional argument
31058 \begin_layout Description
31060 \begin_inset space ~
31069 in the optional argument
31072 \begin_layout Description
31074 \begin_inset space ~
31083 in the optional argument
31086 \begin_layout Description
31088 \begin_inset space ~
31100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31104 \begin_inset Newline newline
31108 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31115 in the optional argument
31118 \begin_layout Description
31120 \begin_inset space ~
31129 , empty optional argument
31132 \begin_layout Description
31135 headrulewidth set to 2
31136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31142 \begin_layout Standard
31143 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31144 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31150 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31159 \begin_layout Standard
31160 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31166 \begin_layout Standard
31170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31174 pagestyle{headings}
31180 \begin_inset Note Note
31183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31184 switches back to page style with the default headings
31192 \begin_layout Section
31193 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31196 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31201 \begin_inset Index idx
31204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31211 \begin_inset Index idx
31214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31223 \begin_layout Standard
31224 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31225 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31226 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31229 \begin_layout Subsection
31233 \begin_layout Standard
31234 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31239 \begin_inset Index idx
31242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31243 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31248 (on some systems named simply
31253 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31255 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31261 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31262 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31270 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31271 automatically installed together with LyX.
31274 \begin_layout Subsection
31278 \begin_layout Standard
31279 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31280 LaTeX, activate the option
31283 \begin_inset space ~
31290 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31296 \begin_inset space ~
31300 \begin_inset space ~
31303 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31310 \begin_inset space ~
31323 \begin_inset space ~
31328 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31331 \begin_layout Standard
31332 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31336 \begin_inset space ~
31344 \begin_inset space ~
31352 \begin_layout Standard
31353 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31357 \begin_layout Standard
31358 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31366 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31367 generated by activating the option
31370 \begin_inset space ~
31376 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31384 \begin_layout Subsection
31385 Selected document parts
31388 \begin_layout Standard
31389 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31390 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31391 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31392 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31394 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31398 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31399 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31400 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31403 \begin_layout Standard
31404 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31410 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31421 is explained in section
31423 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31428 \begin_inset space ~
31438 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31439 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31441 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31443 Here is the result:
31446 \begin_layout Standard
31447 \begin_inset Preview
31449 \begin_layout Standard
31454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31458 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31464 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31474 height_special "totalheight"
31477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31502 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31508 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31530 \begin_layout Standard
31531 Previewing works also for colors.
31532 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31550 is explained in section
31557 \begin_inset space ~
31570 \begin_layout Standard
31571 \begin_inset Preview
31573 \begin_layout Standard
31577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31596 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31601 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31620 \begin_layout Standard
31621 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31627 \begin_layout Standard
31628 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31629 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31630 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31632 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31633 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31634 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31635 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31639 \begin_layout Subsection
31643 \begin_layout Standard
31644 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31647 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31649 \begin_inset space ~
31654 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31655 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31657 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31658 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31659 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31660 the source view window.
31665 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31666 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31667 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31670 \begin_layout Section
31671 Advanced Find and Replace
31672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31674 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31679 \begin_inset Index idx
31682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31689 \begin_inset Index idx
31692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31701 \begin_layout Subsection
31705 \begin_layout Standard
31706 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31707 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31708 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31709 The key-features are:
31712 \begin_layout Itemize
31713 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31714 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31715 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31719 \begin_layout Itemize
31720 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31721 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31722 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31723 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31726 \begin_layout Itemize
31727 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31728 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31729 outside of mathematics environments
31732 \begin_layout Itemize
31733 Search may be widened to a specific
31738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31742 \begin_inset space ~
31745 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31746 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31753 \begin_layout Itemize
31754 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31755 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31760 \begin_inset space ~
31763 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31766 \begin_layout Subsection
31770 \begin_layout Standard
31771 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31773 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31786 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31789 ) or the toolbar button
31792 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31798 Advanced Find and Replace
31803 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31807 \begin_layout Standard
31812 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31816 \begin_inset space ~
31821 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31824 arg "break-paragraph"
31828 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31829 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31833 arg "break-paragraph"
31836 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31840 searches backwards.
31843 \begin_layout Standard
31847 \begin_inset space ~
31852 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31861 \begin_inset space ~
31866 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31869 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31870 Searching for mathematics
31873 \begin_layout Standard
31874 Mathematical formulas, such as
31875 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31878 or something more complex like
31879 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31882 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31887 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31888 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31889 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31890 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31896 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31900 \begin_layout Standard
31901 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31902 This is done by switching to the
31906 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31911 This way, entering in the
31918 \begin_layout Itemize
31919 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31920 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
31923 \begin_layout Itemize
31924 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31925 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
31928 \begin_layout Itemize
31929 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
31930 of it only within section headings.
31931 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31932 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31936 \begin_layout Itemize
31937 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31938 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31941 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31945 \begin_layout Standard
31946 The entries made in the
31950 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
31953 \begin_inset space ~
31959 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31963 button or alternatively press
31966 arg "break-paragraph"
31973 while the cursor is in the
31976 \begin_inset space ~
31984 \begin_layout Standard
31985 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
31986 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
31990 \begin_layout Itemize
31991 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31992 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32000 with its typewriter version
32001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32015 \begin_layout Itemize
32016 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32022 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32034 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32041 (you may want to enable the
32044 \begin_inset space ~
32052 \begin_inset space ~
32057 options and disable the
32065 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32073 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32074 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32078 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32081 , or occurrences of
32082 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32086 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32092 \begin_layout Subsection
32096 \begin_layout Standard
32097 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32102 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32104 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32106 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32115 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32121 This is done with the context menu
32123 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32124 Insert Regular Expression
32126 while the cursor is in the
32131 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32132 expression matching rules
32136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32137 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32143 \begin_inset space ~
32146 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32147 to match expressions.
32152 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32153 same text in the document.
32154 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32155 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32158 \begin_layout Enumerate
32159 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32164 editor the fraction
32165 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32169 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32172 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32173 fractions with the given denominator.
32176 \begin_layout Enumerate
32177 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32189 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32194 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32195 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32196 Also, by inserting a
32197 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32200 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32201 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32204 \begin_layout Standard
32205 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32206 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32207 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32210 , and referring back to them through
32211 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32215 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32219 For example, try searching with the regexp
32220 \begin_inset Newline newline
32223 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32226 \begin_inset Newline newline
32229 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32232 \begin_layout Standard
32233 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32236 \begin_layout Standard
32237 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32245 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32246 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32247 sub-expressions is absolute.
32249 \begin_inset space ~
32253 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32256 always refers to the first occurrence of
32257 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32260 in all entered regexps.
32268 \begin_layout Section
32270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32272 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32277 \begin_inset Index idx
32280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32289 \begin_layout Standard
32290 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32293 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32300 key or the toolbar button
32303 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32306 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32307 beginning of the currently selected text.
32308 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32309 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32310 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32311 scrolled so that it is visible.
32312 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32313 n, if any could be found.
32314 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32318 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32319 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32322 \begin_layout Standard
32323 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32326 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32330 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32331 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32332 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32333 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32336 \begin_inset space ~
32344 arg "dialog-show character"
32347 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32348 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32351 \begin_layout Standard
32352 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32353 \begin_inset Newline newline
32357 \begin_inset Flex URL
32360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32362 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32368 \begin_inset Newline newline
32372 \begin_inset space ~
32375 files for each language.
32376 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32377 \begin_inset space ~
32380 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32389 \begin_inset Newline newline
32392 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32393 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32394 but in most cases these are
32410 is the language code.
32413 \begin_layout Subsection
32417 \begin_layout Standard
32420 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32421 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32423 \begin_inset space ~
32426 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32429 you can set the following things:
32432 \begin_layout Description
32434 \begin_inset space ~
32437 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32438 Depending on your platform,
32452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32453 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32454 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32469 \begin_layout Description
32471 \begin_inset space ~
32474 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32475 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32478 \begin_layout Description
32480 \begin_inset space ~
32483 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32489 \begin_inset space \space{}
32493 This should normally not be needed.
32496 \begin_layout Description
32498 \begin_inset space ~
32502 \begin_inset space ~
32505 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32517 \begin_layout Description
32519 \begin_inset space ~
32522 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32523 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32524 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32525 appear in a context menu.
32526 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32530 \begin_layout Description
32532 \begin_inset space ~
32536 \begin_inset space ~
32540 \begin_inset space ~
32543 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32547 \begin_layout Section
32549 \begin_inset Index idx
32552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32561 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32568 \begin_layout Standard
32569 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32570 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32580 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32582 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32591 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32592 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32593 which are available for many languages.
32596 \begin_layout Standard
32597 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32601 \begin_layout Subsection
32602 Setting up the thesaurus
32605 \begin_layout Standard
32614 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32618 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32623 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32629 \begin_inset space ~
32637 For instance, the US English files are named:
32640 \begin_layout Itemize
32644 \begin_layout Itemize
32648 \begin_layout Standard
32657 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32658 and you just need to point LyX (in
32660 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32661 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32662 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32664 \begin_inset space ~
32669 ) to the path where they are installed.
32673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32674 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32675 ies, typical locations are
32681 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32685 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32689 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32692 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32698 LibreOffice-<Version>
32705 On the Mac, the default location is
32707 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
32708 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32709 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
32710 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
32711 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32712 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32720 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32721 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
32722 correct place right away.
32725 \begin_layout Standard
32726 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
32727 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32731 \begin_layout Itemize
32732 \begin_inset Flex URL
32735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32737 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32745 \begin_layout Standard
32746 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32747 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32749 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32750 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32751 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32753 \begin_inset space ~
32759 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32760 and point LyX there.
32763 \begin_layout Standard
32764 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32766 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32769 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32775 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32778 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32786 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32787 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32788 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32790 \begin_inset space ~
32795 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32798 \begin_layout Subsection
32799 Using the thesaurus
32802 \begin_layout Standard
32803 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32805 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32808 or the toolbar button
32811 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32814 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32816 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32818 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32819 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32820 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32829 ), related terms (such as
32832 \begin_inset space ~
32841 ), compounds (such as
32844 \begin_inset space ~
32853 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32862 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32865 \begin_layout Standard
32866 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32867 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32871 \begin_layout Standard
32872 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32873 the dictionary, such as the above
32877 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32882 \begin_inset space \space{}
32885 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32886 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32887 For example, looking up the word form
32891 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32896 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32901 \begin_inset space \space{}
32912 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32913 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32914 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32917 \begin_layout Section
32919 \begin_inset Index idx
32922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32929 \begin_inset Index idx
32932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32933 Document ! Change Tracking
32939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32941 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32948 \begin_layout Standard
32949 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32950 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32951 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32952 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32954 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32956 \begin_inset space ~
32959 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32961 \begin_inset space ~
32969 \begin_layout Standard
32970 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32984 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32985 You can change the color in
32987 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32988 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32990 \begin_inset space ~
32994 \begin_inset space ~
32999 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33005 \begin_inset Index idx
33008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33009 Color ! Change tracking
33014 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33015 the cursor is in changed text.
33016 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33019 arg "changes-merge"
33025 \begin_layout Standard
33026 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33027 \begin_inset Index idx
33030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33039 \begin_layout Standard
33040 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33046 \begin_layout Standard
33047 \begin_inset Graphics
33048 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33056 \begin_layout Standard
33057 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33063 \begin_layout Standard
33064 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33067 \begin_layout Standard
33068 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33074 \begin_layout Standard
33075 \begin_inset Tabular
33076 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33077 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33078 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33079 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33080 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33089 arg "changes-track"
33097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33103 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33105 \begin_inset space ~
33108 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33110 \begin_inset space ~
33119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33128 arg "changes-output"
33136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33142 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33144 \begin_inset space ~
33147 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33149 \begin_inset space ~
33153 \begin_inset space ~
33157 \begin_inset space ~
33166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33187 Jumps to the next change
33193 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33202 arg "change-accept"
33210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33216 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33218 \begin_inset space ~
33221 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33223 \begin_inset space ~
33232 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33241 arg "change-reject"
33249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33255 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33257 \begin_inset space ~
33260 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33262 \begin_inset space ~
33271 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33280 arg "changes-merge"
33288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33294 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33296 \begin_inset space ~
33299 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33301 \begin_inset space ~
33310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33319 arg "all-changes-accept"
33327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33333 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33335 \begin_inset space ~
33338 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33340 \begin_inset space ~
33344 \begin_inset space ~
33353 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33362 arg "all-changes-reject"
33370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33376 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33378 \begin_inset space ~
33381 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33383 \begin_inset space ~
33387 \begin_inset space ~
33396 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33419 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33420 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33433 \begin_inset space ~
33442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33465 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33467 \begin_inset space ~
33483 \begin_layout Standard
33484 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33490 \begin_layout Standard
33491 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33511 \begin_layout Standard
33512 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33513 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33514 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33515 the next change after the current cursor position.
33516 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33517 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33518 step to the next change.
33519 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33522 \begin_layout Standard
33523 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33524 to describe a change.
33527 \begin_layout Standard
33528 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33533 \begin_inset Index idx
33536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33537 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33543 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33544 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33550 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33553 \begin_layout Section
33554 Comparison of Documents
33555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33557 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33562 \begin_inset Index idx
33565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33566 Comparison of documents
33574 \begin_layout Standard
33575 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33577 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33581 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33583 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33584 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33588 \begin_inset space ~
33592 \begin_inset space ~
33596 \begin_inset space ~
33605 \begin_inset space ~
33609 \begin_inset space ~
33613 \begin_inset space ~
33617 \begin_inset space ~
33621 \begin_inset space ~
33625 \begin_inset space ~
33630 enables the change tracking option
33633 \begin_inset space ~
33637 \begin_inset space ~
33641 \begin_inset space ~
33646 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33649 \begin_layout Section
33650 International Support
33651 \begin_inset Index idx
33654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33655 International support
33663 \begin_layout Standard
33664 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33665 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33666 up LyX to use them:
33667 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33669 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33676 \begin_layout Standard
33677 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33678 \begin_inset space ~
33682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33684 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33691 \begin_layout Subsection
33693 \begin_inset Index idx
33696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33703 \begin_inset Index idx
33706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33707 Document ! Settings
33713 \begin_inset Index idx
33716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33717 Document ! Language
33725 \begin_layout Standard
33728 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33729 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33732 dialog lets you set
33734 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33739 \begin_layout Standard
33744 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33748 \begin_inset space ~
33753 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33754 For details about the different encoding options see section
33755 \begin_inset space ~
33759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33761 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33768 \begin_layout Subsection
33769 Keyboard mapping configuration
33770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33772 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33779 \begin_layout Standard
33780 If you have for example a U.
33781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33784 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33785 can use an alternate keymap.
33786 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33787 use an Italian keymap.
33790 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33791 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33792 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33795 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33796 \begin_inset space ~
33800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33802 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33807 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33808 which one you want to use.
33811 \begin_layout Standard
33812 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33813 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33814 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33818 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33819 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33820 one to support the characters you want.
33821 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33828 \begin_layout Chapter
33831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33833 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33840 \begin_layout Standard
33841 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33842 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33843 topic inside the user's guide.
33846 \begin_layout Section
33848 \begin_inset Index idx
33851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33860 \begin_layout Standard
33865 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33868 \begin_layout Subsection
33872 \begin_layout Standard
33873 Creates a new document.
33876 \begin_layout Subsection
33880 \begin_layout Standard
33881 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33882 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33883 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33886 \begin_layout Subsection
33890 \begin_layout Standard
33894 \begin_layout Subsection
33898 \begin_layout Standard
33899 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33900 Click there on a file to open it.
33903 \begin_layout Subsection
33907 \begin_layout Standard
33908 Closes the current document.
33911 \begin_layout Subsection
33915 \begin_layout Standard
33916 Closes all opened documents.
33919 \begin_layout Subsection
33923 \begin_layout Standard
33924 Saves the actual document.
33927 \begin_layout Subsection
33931 \begin_layout Standard
33932 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33935 \begin_layout Subsection
33939 \begin_layout Standard
33940 Saves all opened documents.
33943 \begin_layout Subsection
33947 \begin_layout Standard
33948 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33951 \begin_layout Subsection
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33956 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33957 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33958 It is described in the section
33960 Version Control in LyX
33964 Additional Features
33969 \begin_layout Subsection
33973 \begin_layout Standard
33974 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
33975 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
33977 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
33980 \begin_layout Standard
33981 When using the menu entry
33984 \begin_inset space ~
33989 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33993 \begin_inset space ~
33997 \begin_inset space ~
34001 \begin_inset space ~
34006 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34007 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34010 \begin_layout Subsection
34012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34021 \begin_layout Standard
34022 You can export your document to various file formats.
34023 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34024 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34025 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34028 \begin_layout Standard
34029 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34031 \begin_inset space ~
34035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34037 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34044 \begin_layout Description
34050 \begin_inset space ~
34057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34064 yX format of the special LyX
34065 \begin_inset space ~
34068 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34069 \begin_inset Newline newline
34072 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34075 \begin_layout Description
34076 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34082 \begin_layout Description
34084 \begin_inset space ~
34087 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34093 \begin_layout Description
34094 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34095 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34096 files paths or file names in your document.
34097 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34104 \begin_layout Description
34105 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34106 in files paths or file names
34109 \begin_layout Description
34111 \begin_inset space ~
34118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34125 eX) DVI-format using the program
34129 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34132 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34140 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34148 \begin_layout Description
34150 \begin_inset space ~
34153 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34157 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34162 \begin_layout Description
34163 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34167 \begin_layout Description
34169 \begin_inset space ~
34173 \begin_inset space ~
34176 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34180 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34188 \begin_layout Description
34195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34203 \begin_inset space ~
34214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34227 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34232 \begin_layout Description
34239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34247 \begin_inset space ~
34252 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34253 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34257 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34260 \begin_layout Description
34267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34275 \begin_inset space ~
34280 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34281 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34289 \begin_layout Description
34296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34304 \begin_inset space ~
34315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34328 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34333 \begin_layout Description
34335 \begin_inset space ~
34339 \begin_inset space ~
34348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34357 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34358 music notation software
34363 \begin_layout Description
34370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34380 \begin_inset space ~
34384 \begin_inset space ~
34387 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34388 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34389 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34392 \begin_layout Description
34399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34409 \begin_inset space ~
34412 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34428 represent the version number)
34431 \begin_layout Description
34438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34447 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34450 \begin_layout Description
34451 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34456 \begin_layout Description
34457 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34459 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34462 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34466 \begin_layout Description
34470 \begin_inset space ~
34475 PDF-format using the program
34479 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34482 \begin_layout Description
34486 \begin_inset space ~
34493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34502 PDF-format using the program
34506 , produces PDF-files directly
34509 \begin_layout Description
34513 \begin_inset space ~
34518 PDF-format using the program
34522 , produces PDF-files directly
34525 \begin_layout Description
34529 \begin_inset space ~
34534 PDF-format using the program
34538 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34541 \begin_layout Description
34545 \begin_inset space ~
34552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34561 PDF-format using the program
34565 , produces PDF-files directly
34568 \begin_layout Description
34572 \begin_inset space ~
34580 \begin_layout Description
34584 \begin_inset space ~
34588 \begin_inset space ~
34593 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34594 and then exported as text using the program
34599 \begin_layout Description
34604 PostScript format using the program
34609 \begin_layout Description
34610 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34611 programming language
34624 it is possible to use
34631 \begin_layout Standard
34632 If one of the menu entries
34639 \begin_inset space ~
34648 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34649 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34650 \begin_inset space ~
34654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34656 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34661 \begin_inset Index idx
34664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34665 Reconfiguration of LyX
34673 \begin_layout Subsection
34677 \begin_layout Standard
34678 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34679 format or send it to a printer.
34680 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34681 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34687 For more information have a look at section
34688 \begin_inset space ~
34692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34694 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34701 \begin_layout Subsection
34705 \begin_layout Standard
34706 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34707 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34708 prefix, see section
34709 \begin_inset space ~
34713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34715 reference "sec:Paths"
34720 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34729 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34730 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34731 \begin_inset space ~
34735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34737 reference "sub:Converters"
34744 \begin_layout Subsection
34745 New and Close Window
34748 \begin_layout Standard
34749 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34752 \begin_layout Subsection
34756 \begin_layout Standard
34757 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34760 \begin_layout Section
34762 \begin_inset Index idx
34765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34774 \begin_layout Subsection
34778 \begin_layout Standard
34779 Described in section
34780 \begin_inset space ~
34784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34786 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34793 \begin_layout Subsection
34794 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34797 \begin_layout Standard
34798 Described in section
34799 \begin_inset space ~
34803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34805 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34812 \begin_layout Subsection
34816 \begin_layout Standard
34817 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34818 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34821 \begin_layout Subsection
34825 \begin_layout Standard
34826 Selects the whole document.
34829 \begin_layout Subsection
34830 Find & Replace (Quick)
34833 \begin_layout Standard
34834 Described in section
34835 \begin_inset space ~
34839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34841 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34848 \begin_layout Subsection
34849 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34852 \begin_layout Standard
34853 Described in section
34854 \begin_inset space ~
34858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34860 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34867 \begin_layout Subsection
34868 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34871 \begin_layout Standard
34872 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34876 \begin_layout Subsection
34880 \begin_layout Standard
34881 Described in section
34882 \begin_inset space ~
34886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34888 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34895 \begin_layout Subsection
34897 \begin_inset Index idx
34900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34901 Paragraph ! Settings
34909 \begin_layout Standard
34910 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34911 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34915 \begin_layout Standard
34916 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34917 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
34923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34926 \begin_inset space ~
34934 \begin_layout Subsection
34938 \begin_layout Standard
34939 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
34940 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
34941 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
34945 \begin_layout Standard
34946 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34948 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34949 The properties of tables are described in section
34950 \begin_inset space ~
34954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34956 reference "sec:Tables"
34960 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34961 \begin_inset space ~
34965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34967 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34974 \begin_layout Subsection
34975 Increase/Decrease List Depth
34978 \begin_layout Standard
34979 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
34981 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34982 \begin_inset space ~
34986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34988 reference "sec:Nesting"
34993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34995 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35002 \begin_layout Section
35004 \begin_inset Index idx
35007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35016 \begin_layout Standard
35017 At the bottom of the
35021 menu the opened documents are listed.
35024 \begin_layout Subsection
35025 Open/Close all Insets
35028 \begin_layout Standard
35029 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35032 \begin_layout Subsection
35033 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35036 \begin_layout Standard
35037 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35040 \begin_layout Standard
35041 Math macros are described in the
35048 \begin_layout Subsection
35052 \begin_layout Standard
35053 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35054 \begin_inset space ~
35058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35060 reference "sec:Navigating"
35065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35067 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35074 \begin_layout Subsection
35078 \begin_layout Standard
35079 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35087 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35094 \begin_layout Subsection
35098 \begin_layout Standard
35099 Opens a window showing console messages.
35100 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35104 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35105 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35108 \begin_layout Subsection
35110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35112 name "sub:Toolbars"
35117 \begin_inset Index idx
35120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35129 \begin_layout Standard
35130 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35131 All toolbars and the
35134 \begin_inset space ~
35139 can be turned on and off.
35144 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35156 \begin_inset space ~
35168 \begin_inset space ~
35173 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35177 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35184 \begin_layout Standard
35189 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35193 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35194 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35195 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35196 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35197 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35200 \begin_layout Standard
35201 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35202 \begin_inset space ~
35206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35208 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35215 \begin_layout Subsection
35219 \begin_layout Standard
35223 \begin_inset space ~
35227 \begin_inset space ~
35231 \begin_inset space ~
35235 \begin_inset space ~
35239 \begin_inset space ~
35243 \begin_inset space ~
35248 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35251 \begin_inset space ~
35255 \begin_inset space ~
35259 \begin_inset space ~
35263 \begin_inset space ~
35267 \begin_inset space ~
35271 \begin_inset space ~
35276 will split it horizontally.
35277 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35278 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35279 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35280 three or more documents at the same time.
35281 To close a split view, use the menu
35284 \begin_inset space ~
35288 \begin_inset space ~
35296 \begin_layout Subsection
35300 \begin_layout Standard
35301 Closes a split view.
35304 \begin_layout Subsection
35308 \begin_layout Standard
35309 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35310 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35311 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35312 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35313 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35316 \begin_layout Section
35318 \begin_inset Index idx
35321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35330 \begin_layout Subsection
35334 \begin_layout Standard
35335 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35336 \begin_inset space ~
35340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35342 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35353 \begin_layout Subsection
35355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35357 name "sub:Special-Character"
35364 \begin_layout Standard
35365 Here you can insert the following characters:
35368 \begin_layout Description
35373 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35375 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35376 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35377 You can get a complete display by checking
35380 \begin_inset space ~
35386 \begin_inset Newline newline
35390 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35398 Not all characters will be visible in the
35402 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35410 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35414 ) can display every character.
35422 \begin_layout Description
35423 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35427 \begin_layout Description
35429 \begin_inset space ~
35433 \begin_inset space ~
35436 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35437 \begin_inset space ~
35441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35443 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35450 \begin_layout Description
35452 \begin_inset space ~
35455 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35458 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35459 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35465 \begin_layout Description
35467 \begin_inset space ~
35470 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35473 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35474 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35480 \begin_layout Description
35482 \begin_inset space ~
35485 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35489 \begin_layout Description
35491 \begin_inset space ~
35494 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35498 \begin_layout Description
35500 \begin_inset space ~
35503 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35509 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35515 \begin_layout Description
35517 \begin_inset space ~
35520 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35524 \begin_layout Description
35526 \begin_inset space ~
35530 \begin_inset Index idx
35533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35540 \begin_inset Index idx
35543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35544 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35549 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35550 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35552 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35557 \begin_inset Index idx
35560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35561 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35567 \begin_inset Newline newline
35570 More information about this feature can be found in the
35576 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35582 \begin_layout Subsection
35586 \begin_layout Standard
35587 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35590 \begin_layout Description
35591 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35592 \begin_inset script superscript
35594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35603 \begin_layout Description
35604 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35605 \begin_inset script subscript
35607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35616 \begin_layout Description
35618 \begin_inset space ~
35621 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35622 \begin_inset space ~
35626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35628 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35635 \begin_layout Description
35637 \begin_inset space ~
35640 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35641 \begin_inset space ~
35645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35647 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35654 \begin_layout Description
35656 \begin_inset space ~
35659 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35660 \begin_inset space ~
35664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35666 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35673 \begin_layout Description
35675 \begin_inset space ~
35678 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35684 \begin_inset space \space{}
35687 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35688 An example from the LyX
35693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35696 To insert a fraction use the command
35701 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35705 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35714 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35721 \begin_layout Description
35723 \begin_inset space ~
35726 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35727 \begin_inset space ~
35731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35733 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35740 \begin_layout Description
35742 \begin_inset space ~
35745 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35746 \begin_inset space ~
35750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35752 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35759 \begin_layout Description
35761 \begin_inset space ~
35764 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35765 \begin_inset space ~
35769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35771 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35778 \begin_layout Description
35779 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35780 \begin_inset space ~
35784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35786 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35793 \begin_layout Description
35795 \begin_inset space ~
35798 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35799 \begin_inset space ~
35803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35805 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35812 \begin_layout Description
35814 \begin_inset space ~
35817 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35818 \begin_inset space ~
35822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35824 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35831 \begin_layout Description
35833 \begin_inset space ~
35837 \begin_inset space ~
35840 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35841 \begin_inset space ~
35845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35847 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35854 \begin_layout Description
35856 \begin_inset space ~
35859 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35860 as described in section
35861 \begin_inset space ~
35865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35867 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35874 \begin_layout Description
35876 \begin_inset space ~
35879 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35880 \begin_inset space ~
35884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35886 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35893 \begin_layout Description
35895 \begin_inset space ~
35898 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
35899 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
35901 \begin_inset space ~
35905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35907 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35914 \begin_layout Description
35916 \begin_inset space ~
35919 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
35920 \begin_inset space ~
35924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35926 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35933 \begin_layout Description
35935 \begin_inset space ~
35939 \begin_inset space ~
35942 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
35943 \begin_inset space ~
35947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35949 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35956 \begin_layout Subsection
35960 \begin_layout Standard
35961 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35965 \begin_inset space ~
35986 are described in section
35987 \begin_inset space ~
35991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35993 reference "sec:toc"
36002 is described in section
36003 \begin_inset space ~
36007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36009 reference "sec:Index"
36017 is described in section
36018 \begin_inset space ~
36022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36024 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36030 BibTeX Bibliography
36032 is described in section
36033 \begin_inset space ~
36037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36039 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36046 \begin_layout Subsection
36050 \begin_layout Standard
36051 To insert floats, as described in section
36052 \begin_inset space ~
36056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36058 reference "sec:Floats"
36062 and in detail the chapter
36069 \begin_inset space ~
36077 \begin_layout Subsection
36081 \begin_layout Standard
36082 To insert notes, described in section
36083 \begin_inset space ~
36087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36089 reference "sec:Notes"
36096 \begin_layout Subsection
36100 \begin_layout Standard
36101 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36103 Branches are described in section
36104 \begin_inset space ~
36108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36110 reference "sec:Branches"
36117 \begin_layout Subsection
36121 \begin_layout Standard
36122 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36123 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36125 An example is the document class
36126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36133 with three custom insets.
36136 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36140 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36146 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36149 \begin_layout Subsection
36151 \begin_inset Index idx
36154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36163 \begin_layout Standard
36164 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36166 For more information see chapter
36168 External Document Parts
36171 \begin_inset space ~
36177 \begin_layout Subsection
36179 \begin_inset Index idx
36182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36191 \begin_layout Standard
36192 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36193 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36200 \begin_inset space ~
36208 \begin_layout Subsection
36212 \begin_layout Standard
36217 dialog as described in section
36218 \begin_inset space ~
36222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36224 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36231 \begin_layout Subsection
36235 \begin_layout Standard
36240 as described in section
36241 \begin_inset space ~
36245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36247 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36254 \begin_layout Subsection
36258 \begin_layout Standard
36263 as described in section
36264 \begin_inset space ~
36268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36270 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36277 \begin_layout Subsection
36279 \begin_inset Index idx
36282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36289 \begin_inset Index idx
36292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36293 Longtables ! Caption
36301 \begin_layout Standard
36302 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36303 Floats are described in section
36304 \begin_inset space ~
36308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36310 reference "sec:Floats"
36314 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36321 \begin_inset space ~
36329 \begin_layout Subsection
36333 \begin_layout Standard
36334 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36335 \begin_inset space ~
36339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36341 reference "sec:Index"
36348 \begin_layout Subsection
36352 \begin_layout Standard
36353 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36354 \begin_inset space ~
36358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36360 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36367 \begin_layout Subsection
36371 \begin_layout Standard
36372 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36373 Tables are described in section
36374 \begin_inset space ~
36378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36380 reference "sec:Tables"
36384 and in detail in the chapter
36391 \begin_inset space ~
36399 \begin_layout Subsection
36403 \begin_layout Standard
36409 Graphics are described in section
36410 \begin_inset space ~
36414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36416 reference "sec:Graphics"
36423 \begin_layout Subsection
36427 \begin_layout Standard
36428 Inserts a URL as described in section
36429 \begin_inset space ~
36433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36435 reference "sub:URLs"
36442 \begin_layout Subsection
36446 \begin_layout Standard
36447 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36448 \begin_inset space ~
36452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36454 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36461 \begin_layout Subsection
36465 \begin_layout Standard
36466 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36467 \begin_inset space ~
36471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36473 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36480 \begin_layout Subsection
36484 \begin_layout Standard
36485 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36486 \begin_inset space ~
36490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36492 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36499 \begin_layout Subsection
36503 \begin_layout Standard
36504 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36505 title or caption of a float.
36506 Inserts a short title as described in section
36507 \begin_inset space ~
36511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36513 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36520 \begin_layout Subsection
36524 \begin_layout Standard
36525 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36526 \begin_inset space ~
36530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36532 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36539 \begin_layout Subsection
36541 \begin_inset Index idx
36544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36553 \begin_layout Standard
36554 Inserts a program listings box.
36555 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36557 Program Code Listings
36562 \begin_inset space ~
36570 \begin_layout Subsection
36574 \begin_layout Standard
36575 Inserts the actual date.
36576 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36578 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36586 \begin_inset space ~
36594 \begin_layout Subsection
36598 \begin_layout Standard
36599 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36600 \begin_inset space ~
36604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36606 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36613 \begin_layout Section
36615 \begin_inset Index idx
36618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36627 \begin_layout Standard
36628 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36629 \begin_inset space ~
36632 of the current document.
36633 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36636 \begin_layout Subsection
36640 \begin_layout Standard
36641 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36642 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36643 to jump, for example, between section
36644 \begin_inset space ~
36648 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36649 \begin_inset space ~
36652 2.5 and use the submenu
36655 \begin_inset space ~
36659 \begin_inset space ~
36666 \begin_inset space ~
36672 \begin_inset space ~
36676 \begin_inset space ~
36682 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36686 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36692 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36695 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36698 \begin_layout Standard
36699 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36703 \begin_inset space ~
36708 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36711 \begin_inset space ~
36716 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36719 \begin_layout Subsection
36720 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36723 \begin_layout Standard
36724 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36728 \begin_layout Subsection
36732 \begin_layout Standard
36733 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36734 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36735 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36739 \begin_inset space ~
36743 \begin_inset space ~
36751 \begin_layout Subsection
36755 \begin_layout Standard
36756 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36759 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36761 \begin_inset space ~
36769 \begin_inset space ~
36774 manual for a detailed description.
36777 \begin_layout Section
36779 \begin_inset Index idx
36782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36791 \begin_layout Subsection
36795 \begin_layout Standard
36796 Change Tracking is described in section
36797 \begin_inset space ~
36801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36803 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36810 \begin_layout Subsection
36815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36825 \begin_layout Standard
36826 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36828 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
36829 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36830 to the clipboard or update the view.
36831 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36834 \begin_layout Subsection
36835 Start Appendix Here
36838 \begin_layout Standard
36839 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36840 as described in section
36841 \begin_inset space ~
36845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36847 reference "sec:Appendices"
36854 \begin_layout Subsection
36856 \begin_inset space ~
36862 \begin_layout Standard
36863 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36864 default output format for the document (menu
36866 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36867 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36868 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36870 \begin_inset space ~
36874 \begin_inset space ~
36880 \begin_inset space ~
36884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36886 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36890 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
36892 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36893 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36895 \begin_inset space ~
36898 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36900 \begin_inset space ~
36903 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36905 \begin_inset space ~
36909 \begin_inset space ~
36915 \begin_inset space ~
36919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36921 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36925 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
36926 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36928 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36929 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36931 \begin_inset space ~
36934 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36936 \begin_inset space ~
36939 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36943 \begin_inset space ~
36947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36949 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36954 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
36955 The default output format is
36958 \begin_inset space ~
36966 \begin_layout Subsection
36967 View (Other Formats)
36970 \begin_layout Standard
36971 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
36972 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
36973 actual document with an external program.
36974 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
36975 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
36976 All possible formats are listed in section
36977 \begin_inset space ~
36981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36983 reference "sub:Export"
36988 You should at least see the menu entry
36993 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
36994 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
36995 \begin_inset space ~
36999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37001 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37006 \begin_inset Index idx
37009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37010 Reconfiguration of LyX
37018 \begin_layout Standard
37019 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37020 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37022 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37023 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37025 \begin_inset space ~
37028 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37030 \begin_inset space ~
37033 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37037 \begin_inset space ~
37041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37043 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37048 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37051 \begin_layout Subsection
37053 \begin_inset space ~
37059 \begin_layout Standard
37060 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37061 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37064 \begin_layout Subsection
37065 Update (Other Formats)
37068 \begin_layout Standard
37069 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37070 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37073 \begin_layout Subsection
37074 View Master Document
37077 \begin_layout Standard
37078 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37094 \begin_inset space ~
37099 manual for more information on this topic).
37100 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37101 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37105 \begin_inset space ~
37109 \begin_inset space ~
37114 generates the output of the whole book, while
37118 will just output the chapter alone.
37121 \begin_layout Standard
37122 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37123 in the document settings (menu
37125 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37126 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37127 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37129 \begin_inset space ~
37133 \begin_inset space ~
37139 \begin_inset space ~
37143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37145 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37149 ) or in the preferences (menu
37151 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37152 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37154 \begin_inset space ~
37157 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37162 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37164 \begin_inset space ~
37168 \begin_inset space ~
37174 \begin_inset space ~
37178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37180 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37187 \begin_layout Subsection
37188 Update Master Document
37191 \begin_layout Standard
37192 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37208 \begin_inset space ~
37213 manual for more information on this topic).
37214 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37215 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37218 \begin_layout Standard
37219 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37220 in the document settings (menu
37222 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37223 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37224 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37230 \begin_inset space ~
37236 \begin_inset space ~
37240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37242 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37246 ) or in the preferences (menu
37248 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37249 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37251 \begin_inset space ~
37254 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37259 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37261 \begin_inset space ~
37265 \begin_inset space ~
37271 \begin_inset space ~
37275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37277 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37284 \begin_layout Subsection
37288 \begin_layout Standard
37289 Un/compresses the current document.
37292 \begin_layout Subsection
37296 \begin_layout Standard
37297 The document settings are described in appendix
37298 \begin_inset space ~
37302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37304 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37311 \begin_layout Section
37313 \begin_inset Index idx
37316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37325 \begin_layout Subsection
37329 \begin_layout Standard
37330 Spell checking is explained in section
37331 \begin_inset space ~
37335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37337 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37344 \begin_layout Subsection
37348 \begin_layout Standard
37349 The thesaurus is described in section
37350 \begin_inset space ~
37354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37356 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37363 \begin_layout Subsection
37365 \begin_inset Index idx
37368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37375 \begin_inset Index idx
37378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37387 \begin_layout Standard
37388 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37389 the highlighted document part.
37392 \begin_layout Subsection
37397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37405 \begin_inset Index idx
37408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37417 \begin_layout Standard
37418 Generates with the help of the program
37422 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37423 This feature is not available on Windows.
37426 \begin_layout Subsection
37431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37439 \begin_inset Index idx
37442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37451 \begin_layout Standard
37452 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37457 \begin_inset space ~
37462 to see the full filename paths.
37465 \begin_layout Subsection
37467 \begin_inset Index idx
37470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37479 \begin_layout Standard
37480 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37481 \begin_inset space ~
37485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37487 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37494 \begin_layout Subsection
37496 \begin_inset Index idx
37499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37500 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37511 Reconfiguration of LyX
37515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37528 \begin_inset Index idx
37531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37532 Reconfiguration of LyX
37540 \begin_layout Standard
37541 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37542 needs; see also section
37543 \begin_inset space ~
37547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37549 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37556 \begin_layout Subsection
37560 \begin_layout Standard
37565 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37566 \begin_inset space ~
37570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37572 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37579 \begin_layout Section
37581 \begin_inset Index idx
37584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37593 \begin_layout Standard
37594 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37596 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37600 \begin_layout Standard
37604 \begin_inset space ~
37609 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37610 found by LyX (see also section
37611 \begin_inset space ~
37615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37617 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37624 \begin_layout Standard
37628 \begin_inset space ~
37635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37644 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37648 \begin_layout Section
37650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37652 name "sec:Toolbars"
37659 \begin_layout Standard
37660 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37661 \begin_inset space ~
37665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37667 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37674 \begin_layout Standard
37675 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37676 This is described in the
37678 Additional Features
37683 \begin_layout Subsection
37685 \begin_inset Index idx
37688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37697 \begin_layout Standard
37698 \begin_inset Graphics
37699 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37707 \begin_layout Standard
37708 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37714 \begin_layout Standard
37715 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37732 \begin_inset Note Note
37735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37736 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37741 manual for more information.
37749 \begin_layout Standard
37750 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37756 \begin_layout Standard
37757 \begin_inset Tabular
37758 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37759 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37760 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37761 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37767 \begin_inset Graphics
37768 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37782 pull-down box for the environments
37795 \begin_layout Standard
37796 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37802 \begin_layout Standard
37804 \begin_inset Tabular
37805 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37806 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37807 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37808 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37809 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37832 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37862 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37892 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37899 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37908 arg "dialog-show print"
37916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37922 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37929 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37938 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37952 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37959 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37982 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37989 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38012 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38042 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38072 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38079 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38102 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38109 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38118 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38132 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38151 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38158 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38172 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38200 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38214 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38215 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38243 Emphasize text, function of the
38245 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38247 \begin_inset space ~
38250 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38280 Set text to noun style, function of the
38282 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38284 \begin_inset space ~
38287 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38305 arg "textstyle-apply"
38313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38317 Format text using the current settings in the
38319 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38321 \begin_inset space ~
38324 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38356 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38357 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38359 \begin_inset space ~
38368 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38377 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38391 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38398 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38405 arg "tabular-insert"
38413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38419 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38426 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38435 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38447 Toggle outline window on/off,
38449 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38456 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38465 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38477 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38483 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38492 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38504 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38517 \begin_layout Subsection
38519 \begin_inset Index idx
38522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38531 \begin_layout Standard
38532 \begin_inset Graphics
38533 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38541 \begin_layout Standard
38542 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38548 \begin_layout Standard
38549 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38553 \begin_layout Standard
38554 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38560 \begin_layout Standard
38561 \begin_inset Tabular
38562 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38563 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38564 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38565 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38602 arg "layout Enumerate"
38610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38620 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38629 arg "layout Itemize"
38637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38647 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38683 arg "layout Description"
38691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38701 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38710 arg "depth-increment"
38718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38724 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38726 \begin_inset space ~
38730 \begin_inset space ~
38739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38748 arg "depth-decrement"
38756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38762 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38764 \begin_inset space ~
38768 \begin_inset space ~
38777 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38786 arg "float-insert figure"
38794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38800 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38801 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38817 arg "float-insert table"
38825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38831 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38832 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38862 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38878 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38892 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38899 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38908 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38922 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38929 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38952 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38954 \begin_inset space ~
38963 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38972 arg "nomencl-insert"
38980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38986 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38988 \begin_inset space ~
38997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39006 arg "footnote-insert"
39014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39020 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39036 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39050 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39052 \begin_inset space ~
39061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39084 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39085 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39098 \begin_inset space ~
39107 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39116 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39130 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39137 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39160 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39167 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39190 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39207 \begin_inset space ~
39216 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39225 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39239 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39240 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39256 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39270 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39271 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39273 \begin_inset space ~
39282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39291 arg "dialog-show character"
39299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39305 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39307 \begin_inset space ~
39310 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39326 arg "layout-paragraph"
39334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39340 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39342 \begin_inset space ~
39351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39360 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39374 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39388 \begin_layout Subsection
39389 View/Update Toolbar
39390 \begin_inset Index idx
39393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39394 Toolbar ! View / Update
39402 \begin_layout Standard
39403 \begin_inset Graphics
39404 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39411 \begin_layout Standard
39412 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39418 \begin_layout Standard
39419 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39423 \begin_layout Standard
39424 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39430 \begin_layout Standard
39431 \begin_inset Tabular
39432 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39433 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39434 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39435 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39436 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39459 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39466 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39475 arg "buffer-update"
39483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39489 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39496 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39505 arg "master-buffer-view"
39513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39519 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39521 \begin_inset space ~
39530 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39539 arg "master-buffer-update"
39547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39553 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39555 \begin_inset space ~
39559 \begin_inset space ~
39568 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39577 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39591 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39592 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39593 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39594 Synchronize with Output
39600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39605 \begin_inset Graphics
39606 filename ../images/view-others.png
39608 groupId toolbarbuttons
39619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39625 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39626 View (Other Formats)
39632 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39637 \begin_inset Graphics
39638 filename ../images/update-others.png
39640 groupId toolbarbuttons
39649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39655 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39656 Update (Other Formats)
39669 \begin_layout Standard
39670 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39674 \begin_layout Subsection
39678 \begin_layout Standard
39679 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39680 \begin_inset space ~
39684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39686 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39690 , the table toolbar
39691 \begin_inset Index idx
39694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39703 \begin_inset space ~
39708 manual and the math macro toolbar
39709 \begin_inset Index idx
39712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39725 \begin_layout Chapter
39726 The Document Settings
39727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39729 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39734 \begin_inset Index idx
39737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39738 Document ! Settings
39746 \begin_layout Standard
39750 \begin_inset space ~
39755 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39756 is called with the menu
39758 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39762 You can save your document settings as default with the
39764 Save as Document Defaults
39766 button in any dialog.
39767 This will create a template named
39771 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
39775 \begin_layout Standard
39780 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39781 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39784 \begin_layout Standard
39785 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39786 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39787 to find the one you are looking for.
39788 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
39789 the submenus of the dialog.
39791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39795 \begin_inset space \space{}
39799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39806 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39807 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39808 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39811 \begin_layout Section
39815 \begin_layout Standard
39816 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39818 Document classes are described in section
39819 \begin_inset space ~
39823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39825 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39833 \begin_layout Standard
39837 \begin_inset space ~
39842 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
39846 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
39847 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39849 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39858 \begin_layout Standard
39859 Some classes use special class options by default.
39860 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39864 and you can decide to use them or not.
39865 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39866 recommended you leave them untouched.
39871 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39876 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
39877 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39883 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39884 \begin_inset Newline newline
39889 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39892 \begin_inset Newline newline
39895 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
39901 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39903 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39915 \begin_layout Standard
39920 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39921 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
39922 document is opened without its master.
39923 This way child documents are always compilable.
39924 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
39931 \begin_inset space ~
39939 \begin_layout Standard
39940 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
39950 \begin_inset Index idx
39953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39954 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
39960 \begin_inset Index idx
39963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39964 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
39969 for cross-references, see section
39970 \begin_inset space ~
39974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39976 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39983 \begin_layout Section
39987 \begin_layout Standard
39988 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
39989 Please refer to the section
39992 \begin_inset space ~
40000 \begin_inset space ~
40005 manual for details.
40008 \begin_layout Section
40012 \begin_layout Standard
40013 Modules are explained in section
40014 \begin_inset space ~
40018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40020 reference "sub:Modules"
40027 \begin_layout Section
40031 \begin_layout Standard
40033 \begin_inset space ~
40037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40039 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40046 \begin_layout Section
40050 \begin_layout Standard
40051 The document font settings are described in section
40052 \begin_inset space ~
40056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40058 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40065 \begin_layout Section
40069 \begin_layout Standard
40070 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40082 \begin_inset space ~
40087 and whether it should be a
40090 \begin_inset space ~
40095 can also be specified here.
40098 \begin_layout Standard
40099 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40101 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40103 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40106 \begin_layout Section
40110 \begin_layout Standard
40111 This dialog is described in sections
40112 \begin_inset space ~
40116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40118 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40125 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40132 \begin_layout Section
40136 \begin_layout Standard
40137 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40138 \begin_inset space ~
40142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40144 reference "sub:Margins"
40151 \begin_layout Section
40153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40155 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40160 \begin_inset Index idx
40163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40164 Language ! Encoding
40172 \begin_layout Standard
40173 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40174 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40175 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40176 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40177 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40178 known for a particular character).
40182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40183 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40188 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40193 manual for details.
40201 \begin_layout Standard
40202 If you use the option
40206 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40207 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40208 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40209 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40210 exactly one encoding.
40211 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40214 \begin_layout Standard
40215 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40216 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40217 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40218 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40219 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40220 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40225 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40226 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40227 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40228 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40229 engines to standard LaTeX.
40230 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40231 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40234 \begin_inset space ~
40241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40253 \begin_inset space ~
40260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40272 \begin_inset space ~
40278 \begin_inset space ~
40282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40284 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40289 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40293 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40296 \begin_layout Standard
40300 \begin_inset space ~
40305 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40315 The possible settings are:
40318 \begin_layout Description
40319 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40321 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40322 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40326 \begin_inset space ~
40330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40332 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40339 \begin_layout Description
40340 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40341 format you will use.
40342 In many cases this will be
40347 \begin_inset Index idx
40350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40351 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40357 If the newer package
40362 \begin_inset Index idx
40365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40366 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40371 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40372 this package will be used instead of
40379 \begin_layout Description
40381 \begin_inset space ~
40392 would be more appropriate.
40395 \begin_layout Description
40396 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40397 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40401 (for German texts), type in
40404 \begin_inset Newline newline
40409 usepackage{ngerman}
40412 \begin_layout Description
40413 None will not use a language package.
40414 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40417 \begin_layout Standard
40418 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40421 \begin_layout Description
40423 \begin_inset space ~
40427 \begin_inset space ~
40431 \begin_inset space ~
40438 , but the LaTeX-package
40443 \begin_inset Index idx
40446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40447 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40453 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40454 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40455 languages in TeX code.
40458 \begin_layout Description
40459 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40460 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40461 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40464 \begin_layout Description
40466 \begin_inset space ~
40470 \begin_inset space ~
40473 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40476 \begin_layout Description
40478 \begin_inset space ~
40482 \begin_inset space ~
40485 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40488 \begin_layout Description
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40493 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40496 \begin_layout Description
40498 \begin_inset space ~
40502 \begin_inset space ~
40505 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40506 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40509 \begin_layout Description
40511 \begin_inset space ~
40515 \begin_inset space ~
40518 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40522 \begin_layout Description
40524 \begin_inset space ~
40528 \begin_inset space ~
40531 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40532 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40535 \begin_layout Description
40537 \begin_inset space ~
40541 \begin_inset space ~
40545 \begin_inset space ~
40548 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40549 \begin_inset space ~
40555 \begin_layout Description
40557 \begin_inset space ~
40561 \begin_inset space ~
40565 \begin_inset space ~
40568 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40569 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40572 \begin_layout Description
40574 \begin_inset space ~
40578 \begin_inset space ~
40581 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40582 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40583 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40584 \begin_inset space ~
40588 \begin_inset space ~
40594 \begin_layout Description
40596 \begin_inset space ~
40600 \begin_inset space ~
40603 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40604 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40605 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40606 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40607 \begin_inset space ~
40611 \begin_inset space ~
40617 \begin_layout Description
40619 \begin_inset space ~
40623 \begin_inset space ~
40626 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40629 \begin_layout Description
40631 \begin_inset space ~
40635 \begin_inset space ~
40638 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40641 \begin_layout Description
40643 \begin_inset space ~
40647 \begin_inset space ~
40650 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40653 \begin_layout Description
40655 \begin_inset space ~
40658 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40661 \begin_layout Description
40663 \begin_inset space ~
40666 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40669 \begin_layout Description
40671 \begin_inset space ~
40675 \begin_inset space ~
40678 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40681 \begin_layout Description
40683 \begin_inset space ~
40687 \begin_inset space ~
40693 \begin_layout Description
40695 \begin_inset space ~
40699 \begin_inset space ~
40702 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40705 \begin_layout Description
40707 \begin_inset space ~
40711 \begin_inset space ~
40717 \begin_layout Description
40719 \begin_inset space ~
40723 \begin_inset space ~
40726 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40731 \begin_inset Index idx
40734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40735 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40740 , when using this, set the document language to
40745 \begin_layout Description
40747 \begin_inset space ~
40751 \begin_inset space ~
40754 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40758 , when using this, set the document language to
40761 \begin_inset space ~
40767 \begin_layout Description
40769 \begin_inset space ~
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40776 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40781 \begin_inset Index idx
40784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40785 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
40790 , when using this, set the document language to
40795 \begin_layout Description
40797 \begin_inset space ~
40801 \begin_inset space ~
40804 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40808 , when using this, set the document language to
40813 \begin_layout Description
40815 \begin_inset space ~
40819 \begin_inset space ~
40822 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40826 , when using this, set the document language to
40831 \begin_layout Description
40833 \begin_inset space ~
40836 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40839 \begin_layout Description
40841 \begin_inset space ~
40845 \begin_inset space ~
40849 \begin_inset space ~
40852 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40855 \begin_layout Description
40857 \begin_inset space ~
40861 \begin_inset space ~
40865 \begin_inset space ~
40868 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40869 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40870 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40873 \begin_layout Description
40875 \begin_inset space ~
40879 \begin_inset space ~
40885 \begin_layout Description
40887 \begin_inset space ~
40891 \begin_inset space ~
40894 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40895 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40898 \begin_layout Description
40900 \begin_inset space ~
40904 \begin_inset space ~
40907 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
40912 \begin_inset Index idx
40915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40916 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40921 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
40924 \begin_layout Description
40926 \begin_inset space ~
40930 \begin_inset space ~
40933 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
40941 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
40946 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
40948 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
40951 \begin_layout Description
40953 \begin_inset space ~
40957 \begin_inset space ~
40960 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40965 \begin_inset Index idx
40968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40969 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
40974 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
40977 \begin_layout Description
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40982 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40987 \begin_inset Index idx
40990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40991 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40997 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41001 \begin_layout Description
41003 \begin_inset space ~
41007 \begin_inset space ~
41011 \begin_inset space ~
41014 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41021 \begin_layout Description
41023 \begin_inset space ~
41027 \begin_inset space ~
41031 \begin_inset space ~
41034 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41035 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41036 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41040 \begin_layout Description
41042 \begin_inset space ~
41046 \begin_inset space ~
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41053 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41054 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41057 \begin_layout Section
41059 \begin_inset Index idx
41062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41069 \begin_inset Index idx
41072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41079 \begin_inset Index idx
41082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41083 Color ! Shaded boxes
41089 \begin_inset Index idx
41092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41093 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41101 \begin_layout Standard
41102 Here you can alter the font color for the
41106 (default: black), for
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41114 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41118 (default: white) and for
41121 \begin_inset space ~
41131 sets the color back to the default.
41134 \begin_layout Standard
41135 Clicking any button showing
41143 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41144 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41145 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41146 later more quickly.
41149 \begin_layout Standard
41150 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41154 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41156 \begin_inset space ~
41159 out note appears blue in the output.)
41167 \begin_layout Standard
41168 Note, if you change the
41171 \begin_inset space ~
41176 font color and use the option
41179 \begin_inset space ~
41184 in the document settings under
41187 \begin_inset space ~
41192 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41199 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41206 \begin_layout Standard
41207 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41213 \begin_layout Standard
41217 \begin_inset space ~
41226 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41228 \begin_inset space ~
41231 Code after a forced page break:
41234 \begin_layout Itemize
41235 For the page color:
41236 \begin_inset Newline newline
41243 pagecolor{color name}
41246 \begin_layout Itemize
41247 For the text color:
41248 \begin_inset Newline newline
41258 \begin_layout Standard
41259 You are restricted to one of
41295 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41302 \begin_inset space ~
41308 \begin_inset Newline newline
41311 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41312 names to refer to them:
41315 \begin_layout Itemize
41321 \begin_inset Newline newline
41326 page_backgroundcolor
41329 \begin_layout Itemize
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41339 \begin_inset Newline newline
41347 \begin_layout Itemize
41351 \begin_inset space ~
41357 \begin_inset Newline newline
41365 \begin_layout Itemize
41369 \begin_inset space ~
41375 \begin_inset Newline newline
41383 \begin_layout Standard
41384 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41385 \begin_inset space ~
41388 Cells of the Embedded
41389 \begin_inset space ~
41395 \begin_layout Section
41399 \begin_layout Standard
41400 Here you can adjust the
41404 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41408 as described in section
41409 \begin_inset space ~
41413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41415 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41422 \begin_layout Section
41426 \begin_layout Standard
41427 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41432 \begin_inset Index idx
41435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41436 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41446 \begin_inset Index idx
41449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41450 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41458 Sectioned bibliography
41460 using the LaTeX package
41465 \begin_inset Index idx
41468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41469 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41474 and you can select a
41478 for the generation of the bibliography.
41479 For a further description see section
41480 \begin_inset space ~
41484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41486 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41493 \begin_layout Section
41497 \begin_layout Standard
41498 Here you can define the
41502 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41504 \begin_inset space ~
41508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41510 reference "sec:Index"
41517 \begin_layout Section
41521 \begin_layout Standard
41522 The PDF properties are explained in section
41523 \begin_inset space ~
41527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41529 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41536 \begin_layout Section
41540 \begin_layout Standard
41541 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41546 \begin_inset Index idx
41549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41550 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41560 \begin_inset Index idx
41563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41564 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41574 \begin_inset Index idx
41577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41578 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41588 \begin_inset Index idx
41591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41592 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41597 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41600 \begin_layout Description
41601 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41602 ensure that you have enabled
41605 \begin_inset space ~
41613 \begin_layout Description
41614 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41617 \begin_inset space ~
41629 \begin_layout Description
41630 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41641 \begin_layout Description
41642 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41644 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41653 \begin_layout Section
41657 \begin_layout Standard
41658 The float placement options are described in the section
41661 \begin_inset space ~
41669 \begin_inset space ~
41677 \begin_layout Section
41681 \begin_layout Standard
41682 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41684 Program Code Listings
41689 \begin_inset space ~
41697 \begin_layout Section
41701 \begin_layout Standard
41702 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41710 set to be used and set the
41715 The itemize environment is described in section
41716 \begin_inset space ~
41720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41722 reference "sec:Itemize"
41729 \begin_layout Standard
41730 You can furthermore specify a
41733 \begin_inset space ~
41738 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
41739 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41746 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41752 \begin_inset space \space{}
41756 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41766 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41767 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41770 \begin_layout Standard
41771 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41779 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
41782 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41783 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41785 \begin_inset space ~
41791 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41795 usepackage{textcomp}
41798 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41802 usepackage{amssymb}
41812 \begin_layout Section
41816 \begin_layout Standard
41817 Branches are described in section
41818 \begin_inset space ~
41822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41824 reference "sec:Branches"
41831 \begin_layout Section
41833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41835 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41842 \begin_layout Standard
41843 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41846 \begin_layout Description
41848 \begin_inset space ~
41852 \begin_inset space ~
41855 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41875 View Master Document
41876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41883 Update Master Document
41884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41891 menu or the toolbar.
41892 The default is set in
41894 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41895 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41897 \begin_inset space ~
41900 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41904 \begin_inset space ~
41908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41910 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41917 \begin_layout Description
41919 \begin_inset space ~
41923 \begin_inset space ~
41926 Output settings for the menu
41928 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41930 \begin_inset space ~
41936 For a detailed description see section
41938 Reverse DVI/PDF search
41943 \begin_inset space ~
41951 \begin_layout Description
41953 \begin_inset space ~
41957 \begin_inset space ~
41960 Options offers settings for the export format
41966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41979 \begin_inset space ~
41984 will assure that the output follows exactly version
41985 \begin_inset space ~
41988 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
41992 \begin_inset space ~
41997 settings are described in detail in section
41999 Math Output in XHTML
42004 \begin_inset space ~
42013 \begin_inset space ~
42017 \begin_inset space ~
42022 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42025 \begin_layout Section
42030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42040 \begin_layout Standard
42041 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42042 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42043 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42044 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42048 \begin_layout Standard
42049 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42050 \begin_inset space ~
42054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42056 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42063 \begin_layout Chapter
42069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42071 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42076 \begin_inset Index idx
42079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42088 \begin_layout Standard
42089 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42091 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42095 It has the following submenus.
42098 \begin_layout Section
42102 \begin_layout Subsection
42106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42107 User Interface File
42108 \begin_inset Index idx
42111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42112 Customization ! of toolbars
42118 \begin_inset Index idx
42121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42122 Customization ! of menus
42130 \begin_layout Standard
42131 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42132 interface (ui) file.
42133 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42141 \begin_layout Description
42146 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42149 \begin_layout Description
42156 the menu entries in popup context menus
42159 \begin_layout Description
42164 specifies the toolbar buttons
42167 \begin_layout Standard
42168 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42169 and edit the entries.
42172 \begin_layout Standard
42173 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42185 entries must be finished with an explicit
42210 and in the case of the
42211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42223 The syntax for the entries is:
42226 \begin_layout Standard
42227 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42255 \begin_layout Standard
42257 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42260 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42262 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42275 \begin_inset space ~
42283 \begin_layout Standard
42284 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42290 \begin_layout Standard
42291 For example, assuming you use the menu
42293 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42296 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42300 \begin_layout Standard
42301 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42325 \begin_layout Standard
42327 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42342 to have the sixth bookmark.
42345 \begin_layout Standard
42349 \begin_inset space ~
42354 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42355 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42356 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42359 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42370 \begin_layout Standard
42373 Enable tool tips in main work area
42375 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42379 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42383 \begin_layout Standard
42386 Restore window layouts and geometries
42388 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42389 in the last LyX session.
42392 \begin_layout Standard
42395 Restore cursor positions
42397 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42401 \begin_layout Standard
42404 Load opened files from last session
42406 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42409 \begin_layout Standard
42412 Clear all session information
42414 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42415 of last opened documents, etc.).
42418 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42422 name "sub:Backup documents"
42427 \begin_inset Index idx
42430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42439 \begin_layout Standard
42442 Backup original documents when saving
42444 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42445 it was saved the last time.
42446 It is stored in the
42449 \begin_inset space ~
42455 \begin_inset space ~
42459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42461 reference "sec:Paths"
42465 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42468 \begin_inset space ~
42474 The backup file has the file extension
42475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42489 \begin_layout Standard
42492 Backup documents, every
42494 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42497 \begin_layout Standard
42500 Save documents compressed by default
42502 always saves files in a compressed format.
42505 \begin_layout Standard
42510 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42513 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42515 \begin_inset space ~
42523 \begin_layout Standard
42526 Open documents in tabs
42528 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42531 \begin_layout Standard
42536 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42548 reference "sec:Paths"
42552 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42558 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42560 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42563 \begin_layout Standard
42566 Single close-tab button
42568 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42571 \begin_inset Graphics
42572 filename ../images/closetab.png
42579 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42580 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42583 \begin_layout Standard
42584 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42592 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42600 \begin_layout Subsection
42602 \begin_inset Index idx
42605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42614 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42621 \begin_layout Standard
42622 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42625 \begin_layout Standard
42626 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42634 This section only deals with the fonts
42639 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42642 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42643 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42654 \begin_layout Standard
42655 By default, LyX uses
42671 (depends on the system) as its
42674 \begin_inset space ~
42690 \begin_layout Standard
42691 You can change the font size with the
42698 \begin_layout Standard
42703 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42708 points have the size of 1
42709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42713 \begin_inset space ~
42717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42719 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42724 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42729 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42730 \begin_inset space ~
42734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42736 reference "sub:Document-Font"
42743 \begin_layout Standard
42746 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42748 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
42749 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42750 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42751 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42753 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42754 \begin_inset space ~
42760 \begin_layout Subsection
42762 \begin_inset Index idx
42765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42772 \begin_inset Index idx
42775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42784 \begin_layout Standard
42785 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
42786 the list and selecting the
42793 \begin_layout Standard
42794 By checking the option
42798 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42801 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42802 \begin_inset space ~
42806 \begin_inset space ~
42811 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42814 \begin_layout Subsection
42816 \begin_inset Index idx
42819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42828 \begin_layout Standard
42829 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
42832 \begin_layout Standard
42837 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42838 This feature is described in section
42839 \begin_inset space ~
42843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42845 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42852 \begin_layout Standard
42853 Checking the option
42856 \begin_inset space ~
42860 \begin_inset space ~
42864 \begin_inset space ~
42869 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42872 \begin_layout Section
42874 \begin_inset Index idx
42877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42886 \begin_layout Subsection
42890 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42894 \begin_layout Standard
42897 Cursor follows scrollbar
42899 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42903 \begin_layout Standard
42904 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42905 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42906 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42909 \begin_layout Standard
42912 Scroll below end of document
42914 is self-explanatory.
42917 \begin_layout Standard
42918 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
42925 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
42927 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
42928 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
42931 \begin_layout Standard
42934 Sort environments alphabetically
42936 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42939 \begin_layout Standard
42942 Group environments by their category
42944 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42947 \begin_layout Standard
42952 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
42963 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42967 \begin_layout Standard
42968 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
42973 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
42974 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
42978 \begin_layout Subsection
42980 \begin_inset Index idx
42983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42990 \begin_inset Index idx
42993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42994 Settings ! Shortcuts
43002 \begin_layout Standard
43007 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43008 Several binding files are available, among them:
43011 \begin_layout Description
43012 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43015 \begin_layout Description
43016 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43028 \begin_layout Description
43029 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43040 \begin_layout Standard
43041 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43046 , and binding files for special languages.
43047 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43052 \begin_inset space \space{}
43056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43064 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43068 \begin_layout Standard
43069 Some binding files, like
43073 , only have a limited scope.
43074 When looking at the end of the file
43078 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43081 \begin_layout Standard
43085 \begin_inset space ~
43089 \begin_inset space ~
43094 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43095 in the selected key binding file.
43098 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43102 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43107 \begin_inset Index idx
43110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43111 Key Bindings ! Editing
43119 \begin_layout Standard
43120 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43121 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43122 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43125 Show key-bindings containing
43128 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43129 Insert there for example as keyword
43130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43137 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43138 functions that contain
43139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43147 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43148 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43152 that you will find in the
43159 \begin_layout Standard
43160 For example, to add the shortcut
43168 , select the function and press the
43173 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43174 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43177 \begin_layout Standard
43178 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43179 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43180 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43181 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43182 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43187 \begin_layout Standard
43188 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43191 \begin_layout Standard
43192 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43194 The syntax of the entries is:
43197 \begin_layout Standard
43203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43221 \begin_layout Subsection
43223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43225 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43230 \begin_inset Index idx
43233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43240 \begin_inset Index idx
43243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43244 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43252 \begin_layout Standard
43253 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43254 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43255 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43256 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43259 \begin_inset space ~
43263 \begin_inset space ~
43268 and select the keyboard map file named
43275 \begin_layout Standard
43284 keyboard map and, if you use the
43288 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43291 arg "keymap-primary"
43297 arg "keymap-secondary"
43300 respectively or toggle between them with
43303 arg "keymap-toggle"
43309 \begin_layout Standard
43310 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43318 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43327 \begin_layout Standard
43328 You can also specify the mouse
43330 Wheel scrolling speed
43333 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43337 \begin_layout Standard
43345 \begin_inset space ~
43349 \begin_inset space ~
43354 you can select a key for zooming.
43355 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43358 \begin_layout Subsection
43362 \begin_layout Standard
43363 Input completion is described in section
43364 \begin_inset space ~
43368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43370 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43377 \begin_layout Section
43379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43386 \begin_inset Index idx
43389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43396 \begin_inset Index idx
43399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43408 \begin_layout Standard
43409 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43411 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43414 \begin_layout Description
43416 \begin_inset space ~
43419 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43420 It is the default when you
43431 \begin_inset space ~
43439 \begin_layout Description
43441 \begin_inset space ~
43444 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43446 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43448 \begin_inset space ~
43452 \begin_inset space ~
43460 \begin_layout Description
43462 \begin_inset space ~
43465 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43471 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43475 \begin_inset Newline newline
43479 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43491 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43499 \begin_layout Description
43501 \begin_inset space ~
43505 \begin_inset Index idx
43508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43514 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43515 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43516 \begin_inset space ~
43520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43522 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43530 will be used to save the backups.
43531 \begin_inset Newline newline
43534 Backup files have the ending
43535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43545 \begin_layout Description
43550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43558 \begin_inset space ~
43561 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43562 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43563 \begin_inset Newline newline
43570 You add a BibTeX-database
43575 You can edit this file with the program
43584 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43587 \begin_inset space ~
43593 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43598 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43599 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43605 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43606 \begin_inset Newline newline
43609 The pipe is also used for the
43614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43620 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43625 \begin_inset Newline newline
43628 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43629 \begin_inset Newline newline
43645 \begin_layout Description
43647 \begin_inset space ~
43650 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43653 \begin_layout Description
43655 \begin_inset space ~
43658 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43659 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43660 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43663 \begin_layout Description
43665 \begin_inset space ~
43668 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43674 You only need to specify it if you are using
43678 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43684 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43688 \begin_layout Description
43690 \begin_inset space ~
43693 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43694 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
43695 where to find it on the system.
43696 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
43697 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43706 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43707 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43710 \begin_layout Description
43712 \begin_inset space ~
43715 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43716 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
43718 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43720 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43721 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43722 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43723 scanned for the input files.
43724 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43725 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
43726 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43727 compilation may fail for some documents.
43730 \begin_layout Section
43734 \begin_layout Standard
43735 Here you can insert your
43744 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43746 \begin_inset space ~
43750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43752 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43756 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43759 \begin_layout Section
43761 \begin_inset Index idx
43764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43765 Language ! Settings
43771 \begin_inset Index idx
43774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43775 Settings ! Language
43783 \begin_layout Subsection
43785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43787 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
43794 \begin_layout Description
43796 \begin_inset space ~
43800 \begin_inset space ~
43803 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
43804 You can find its actual translation status here:
43805 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43807 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43814 \begin_layout Description
43816 \begin_inset space ~
43819 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
43821 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43822 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43839 The most widespread language package is
43844 \begin_inset Index idx
43847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43848 LaTeX-packages ! babel
43853 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
43854 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
43855 alternative language package
43860 \begin_inset Index idx
43863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43864 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
43869 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43870 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43876 The available selections are described in section
43877 \begin_inset space ~
43881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43883 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43890 \begin_layout Description
43892 \begin_inset space ~
43895 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
43896 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
43897 An example is the start command
43903 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43908 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43923 selectlanguage{$$lang}
43928 \begin_layout Description
43930 \begin_inset space ~
43938 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
43939 command toggles the package on and off.
43942 \begin_layout Description
43944 \begin_inset space ~
43948 \begin_inset space ~
43951 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
43955 \begin_layout Description
43957 \begin_inset space ~
43961 \begin_inset space ~
43964 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
43965 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
43966 used by all LaTeX-packages.
43967 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
43974 \begin_layout Description
43976 \begin_inset space ~
43979 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
43981 When this option is not set, the
43984 \begin_inset space ~
43989 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
43990 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
43993 \begin_inset space ~
44001 \begin_layout Description
44003 \begin_inset space ~
44009 \begin_inset space ~
44015 When it is not set, the
44018 \begin_inset space ~
44023 is set to the end of the document.
44026 \begin_layout Description
44028 \begin_inset space ~
44032 \begin_inset space ~
44035 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44036 language will be underlined in blue.
44039 \begin_layout Description
44041 \begin_inset space ~
44045 \begin_inset space ~
44048 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44049 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44052 \begin_layout Description
44054 \begin_inset space ~
44057 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44058 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44059 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44060 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44063 \begin_layout Subsection
44067 \begin_layout Standard
44068 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44069 \begin_inset space ~
44073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44075 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44082 \begin_layout Section
44086 \begin_layout Subsection
44090 \begin_layout Description
44092 \begin_inset space ~
44096 \begin_inset space ~
44099 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44102 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44103 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44105 \begin_inset space ~
44111 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44114 \begin_layout Description
44116 \begin_inset space ~
44120 \begin_inset Index idx
44123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44130 \begin_inset Index idx
44133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44134 Settings ! Date format
44139 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44140 \begin_inset Newline newline
44144 \begin_inset Flex URL
44147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44149 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44155 \begin_inset Newline newline
44158 For example the format
44159 \begin_inset Newline newline
44163 \begin_inset Newline newline
44166 prints the date as day/month/year.
44169 \begin_layout Description
44171 \begin_inset space ~
44175 \begin_inset space ~
44178 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44181 \begin_layout Description
44183 \begin_inset space ~
44186 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44188 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44190 \begin_inset space ~
44196 For a detailed description see section
44198 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44203 \begin_inset space ~
44211 \begin_layout Subsection
44213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44220 \begin_inset Index idx
44223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44230 \begin_inset Index idx
44233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44242 \begin_layout Description
44244 \begin_inset space ~
44247 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44252 The name will be used when the
44257 \begin_inset Newline newline
44261 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44269 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44277 \begin_layout Description
44279 \begin_inset space ~
44282 command is the command LyX
44283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44290 LaTeX uses for printing.
44298 \begin_layout Description
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44304 \begin_inset space ~
44307 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44308 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44309 of the program that provides the
44316 \begin_layout Description
44318 \begin_inset space ~
44322 \begin_inset space ~
44326 \begin_inset space ~
44329 printer This option works only for the
44334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44346 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44347 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44350 \begin_layout Subsection
44355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44365 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44370 \begin_inset Index idx
44373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44382 \begin_layout Description
44384 \begin_inset space ~
44391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44399 \begin_inset space ~
44403 \begin_inset space ~
44406 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44411 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44432 are used for Cyrillic.
44433 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44446 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44447 LyX sets up in the background.
44448 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44451 \begin_layout Description
44453 \begin_inset space ~
44457 \begin_inset space ~
44460 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44465 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44468 \begin_layout Description
44470 \begin_inset space ~
44474 \begin_inset space ~
44478 \begin_inset space ~
44482 \begin_inset space ~
44485 options They only have an effect when the program
44489 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44492 \begin_layout Standard
44493 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44494 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44495 manuals of the applications.
44498 \begin_layout Description
44500 \begin_inset space ~
44503 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44504 \begin_inset space ~
44508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44510 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44517 \begin_layout Description
44519 \begin_inset space ~
44522 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44523 \begin_inset space ~
44527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44529 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44536 \begin_layout Description
44538 \begin_inset space ~
44541 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44542 \begin_inset space ~
44546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44548 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44555 \begin_layout Description
44560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44568 \begin_inset space ~
44571 command Command for the program
44575 that is described in the section
44581 Additional Features
44586 \begin_layout Standard
44587 There are additionally the following options:
44590 \begin_layout Description
44592 \begin_inset space ~
44596 \begin_inset space ~
44600 \begin_inset space ~
44604 \begin_inset space ~
44608 \begin_inset space ~
44611 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44629 to separate folders.
44630 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44631 \begin_inset Index idx
44634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44641 \begin_inset Index idx
44644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44653 \begin_layout Description
44655 \begin_inset space ~
44659 \begin_inset space ~
44663 \begin_inset space ~
44667 \begin_inset space ~
44671 \begin_inset space ~
44675 \begin_inset space ~
44678 changes Removes all manually set
44684 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44685 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44687 \begin_inset space ~
44692 dialog when changing the document class.
44695 \begin_layout Section
44697 \begin_inset space ~
44701 \begin_inset Index idx
44704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44713 \begin_layout Subsection
44715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44717 name "sub:Converters"
44722 \begin_inset Index idx
44725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44734 \begin_layout Standard
44735 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44736 from one format to another.
44737 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44738 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44745 \begin_inset space ~
44750 field and press the
44755 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44759 \begin_inset space ~
44764 drop-down list, modify the
44768 field and press the
44775 \begin_layout Standard
44778 Converter File Cache
44784 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44786 Maximum Age (in days
44789 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44790 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44793 \begin_layout Standard
44794 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44795 definition, is described in the section
44806 \begin_layout Subsection
44808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44810 name "sec:File-Formats"
44815 \begin_inset Index idx
44818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44825 \begin_inset Index idx
44828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44837 \begin_layout Standard
44838 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
44847 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44850 \begin_layout Standard
44851 You can also define the
44853 Default output format
44855 that is used when you use
44857 View, Update, View Master Document
44861 Update Master Document
44867 menu or the toolbar.
44870 \begin_layout Standard
44871 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44882 \begin_layout Standard
44883 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
44884 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44885 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44886 This is done by specifying a
44891 More about this is described in the section
44902 \begin_layout Chapter
44903 Units available in LyX
44904 \begin_inset Index idx
44907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44916 name "chap:Units-available-in"
44923 \begin_layout Standard
44925 \begin_inset space ~
44929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44931 reference "tab:Units"
44935 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
44938 \begin_layout Standard
44939 \begin_inset Float table
44945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44946 \begin_inset Caption Standard
44948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44964 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44972 \begin_inset Tabular
44973 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
44974 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
44975 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44976 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45127 scaled point (65536
45128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45188 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45243 % of original image width
45250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45457 \begin_layout Chapter
45459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45461 name "chap:Credits"
45468 \begin_layout Standard
45469 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45470 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45473 \begin_layout Itemize
45476 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45479 \begin_layout Itemize
45485 \begin_layout Itemize
45491 \begin_layout Itemize
45497 \begin_layout Itemize
45503 \begin_layout Itemize
45509 \begin_layout Itemize
45515 \begin_layout Itemize
45521 \begin_layout Itemize
45524 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45527 \begin_layout Itemize
45533 \begin_layout Itemize
45539 \begin_layout Itemize
45545 \begin_layout Itemize
45551 \begin_layout Itemize
45557 \begin_layout Itemize
45563 \begin_layout Itemize
45569 \begin_layout Itemize
45575 \begin_layout Itemize
45577 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45586 \begin_layout Standard
45587 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45590 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45597 \begin_layout Bibliography
45598 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45599 LatexCommand bibitem
45606 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45609 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45614 \begin_inset Newline newline
45618 \begin_inset Flex URL
45621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45623 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45631 \begin_layout Bibliography
45632 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45633 LatexCommand bibitem
45634 key "latexcompanion"
45638 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45640 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45643 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45646 \begin_layout Bibliography
45647 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45648 LatexCommand bibitem
45653 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45656 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45659 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45662 \begin_layout Bibliography
45663 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45664 LatexCommand bibitem
45671 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45674 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45677 \begin_layout Bibliography
45678 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45679 LatexCommand bibitem
45691 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45694 \begin_layout Bibliography
45695 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45696 LatexCommand bibitem
45702 \begin_inset Newline newline
45706 \begin_inset Flex URL
45709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45711 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45719 \begin_layout Bibliography
45720 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45721 LatexCommand bibitem
45727 \begin_inset Newline newline
45731 \begin_inset Flex URL
45734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45736 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45744 \begin_layout Bibliography
45745 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45746 LatexCommand bibitem
45752 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45754 name "Documentation"
45755 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45764 \begin_inset Newline newline
45768 \begin_inset Flex URL
45771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45773 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45781 \begin_layout Bibliography
45782 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45783 LatexCommand bibitem
45789 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45791 name "Documentation"
45792 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45796 how to use the program
45801 \begin_inset Newline newline
45805 \begin_inset Flex URL
45808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45810 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45818 \begin_layout Bibliography
45819 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45820 LatexCommand bibitem
45826 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45828 name "Documentation"
45829 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45838 \begin_inset Newline newline
45842 \begin_inset Flex URL
45845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45847 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45855 \begin_layout Bibliography
45856 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45857 LatexCommand bibitem
45863 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45865 name "Documentation"
45866 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45875 \begin_inset Newline newline
45879 \begin_inset Flex URL
45882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45884 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
45892 \begin_layout Bibliography
45893 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45894 LatexCommand bibitem
45900 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45902 name "Documentation"
45903 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
45907 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
45908 \begin_inset Newline newline
45912 \begin_inset Flex URL
45915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45917 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
45925 \begin_layout Bibliography
45926 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45927 LatexCommand bibitem
45933 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45935 name "Documentation"
45936 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
45940 of the LaTeX-package
45945 \begin_inset Index idx
45948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45949 LaTeX-packages ! caption
45955 \begin_inset Newline newline
45959 \begin_inset Flex URL
45962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45964 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
45972 \begin_layout Bibliography
45973 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45974 LatexCommand bibitem
45980 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45982 name "Documentation"
45983 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
45987 of the LaTeX-package
45992 \begin_inset Index idx
45995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45996 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46002 \begin_inset Newline newline
46006 \begin_inset Flex URL
46009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46011 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46019 \begin_layout Bibliography
46020 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46021 LatexCommand bibitem
46027 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46029 name "Documentation"
46030 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46034 of the LaTeX-package
46039 \begin_inset Index idx
46042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46043 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46049 \begin_inset Newline newline
46053 \begin_inset Flex URL
46056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46058 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46066 \begin_layout Bibliography
46067 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46068 LatexCommand bibitem
46074 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46076 name "Documentation"
46077 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46081 of the LaTeX-package
46086 \begin_inset Index idx
46089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46090 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46096 \begin_inset Newline newline
46100 \begin_inset Flex URL
46103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46105 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46113 \begin_layout Bibliography
46114 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46115 LatexCommand bibitem
46121 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46123 name "Documentation"
46124 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46128 of the LaTeX-package
46133 \begin_inset Index idx
46136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46137 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46143 \begin_inset Newline newline
46147 \begin_inset Flex URL
46150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46152 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46160 \begin_layout Bibliography
46161 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46162 LatexCommand bibitem
46168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46170 name "Documentation"
46171 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46175 of the LaTeX-package
46180 \begin_inset Index idx
46183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46184 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46190 \begin_inset Newline newline
46194 \begin_inset Flex URL
46197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46199 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46207 \begin_layout Bibliography
46208 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46209 LatexCommand bibitem
46215 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46217 name "Documentation"
46218 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46222 of the LaTeX-package
46227 \begin_inset Index idx
46230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46231 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46237 \begin_inset Newline newline
46241 \begin_inset Flex URL
46244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46246 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46254 \begin_layout Bibliography
46255 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46256 LatexCommand bibitem
46262 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46265 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46269 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46270 \begin_inset Newline newline
46274 \begin_inset Flex URL
46277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46279 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46287 \begin_layout Bibliography
46288 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46289 LatexCommand bibitem
46295 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46298 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46302 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46303 \begin_inset Newline newline
46307 \begin_inset Flex URL
46310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46312 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46320 \begin_layout Bibliography
46321 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46322 LatexCommand bibitem
46328 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46331 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46335 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46336 \begin_inset Newline newline
46340 \begin_inset Flex URL
46343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46345 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46353 \begin_layout Bibliography
46354 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46355 LatexCommand bibitem
46361 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46364 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46368 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46369 \begin_inset Newline newline
46373 \begin_inset Flex URL
46376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46378 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46386 \begin_layout Bibliography
46387 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46388 LatexCommand bibitem
46394 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46397 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46401 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46402 \begin_inset Newline newline
46406 \begin_inset Flex URL
46409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46411 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46419 \begin_layout Bibliography
46420 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46421 LatexCommand bibitem
46427 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46430 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46434 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46435 \begin_inset Newline newline
46439 \begin_inset Flex URL
46442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46444 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46452 \begin_layout Bibliography
46453 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46454 LatexCommand bibitem
46460 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46463 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46467 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46468 \begin_inset Newline newline
46472 \begin_inset Flex URL
46475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46477 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46485 \begin_layout Bibliography
46486 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46487 LatexCommand bibitem
46493 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46496 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46500 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46501 \begin_inset Newline newline
46505 \begin_inset Flex URL
46508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46510 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46518 \begin_layout Bibliography
46519 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46520 LatexCommand bibitem
46526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46529 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46533 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46534 \begin_inset Newline newline
46538 \begin_inset Flex URL
46541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46543 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46551 \begin_layout Bibliography
46552 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46553 LatexCommand bibitem
46559 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46562 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46566 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46567 \begin_inset Newline newline
46571 \begin_inset Flex URL
46574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46576 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46584 \begin_layout Bibliography
46585 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46586 LatexCommand bibitem
46592 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46595 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46599 about new features in
46604 \begin_inset Newline newline
46608 \begin_inset Flex URL
46611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46613 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46621 \begin_layout Standard
46622 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46656 \begin_inset Note Note
46659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46666 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46667 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46668 bibliography is the second one:
46676 \begin_layout Standard
46677 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46678 LatexCommand bibtex
46679 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
46680 options "biblio/alphadin"
46687 \begin_layout Standard
46688 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
46691 \begin_layout Standard
46692 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46693 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46699 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46700 LatexCommand printindex